JP7271273B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

Generally known game machines of this type are ones that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. As such a game machine, for example, there is a game machine that provides a suggestive display that can suggest the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state by changing the display mode step by step, such as a meter display (see Patent Document 1). .

JP 2013-233322 A

However, as in Patent Literature 1, in the production of a suggestive display that can suggest the degree of expectation controlled to an advantageous state by changing the display mode in stages, there is no surprise in the timing of the change of the suggestive display, and the game is played. There was a problem that it was insufficient to excite interest in.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
variable display effect means for variably displaying effect identification information using the display means;
a suggestive display rendering means for displaying a suggestive display capable of suggesting the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state corresponding to the stage by changing the display mode step by step using the display means,
The suggestive display rendering means includes:
It is possible to once erase the suggestive display at a plurality of types of timing,
It is possible to display again after erasing the suggestive display,
When the suggestive display is displayed again, the suggestion that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state changes to a higher stage than before the temporary erasure after the specific effect executed before the temporary erasure is executed again. It is possible to display the display,
Depending on the timing at which the suggestive display is once erased, the ratio of the step corresponding to the degree of expectation that the re-displayed suggestive display will be controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The variable display effect means continuously and variably displays the effect identification information in a state where the suggestive display is once erased,
The suggestive display rendering means is capable of displaying the suggestive display again after temporarily erasing the suggestive display after a predetermined notification to the effect that the control to the advantageous state is not made.
It is characterized by
(1) Set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player and that has different degrees of advantage for the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 1, etc.) that can
Suggestion display (suggestion display 111F001, etc. in FIG. 8-4, etc.) that can suggest the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state by changing the gradual display mode (gradual display mode such as numerical display and level display) A suggestion display means for displaying
The suggestive display means can display the suggestive display again (FIG. 8-4(M), etc.) after temporarily erasing the suggestive display (FIG. 8-4 (J), etc.), and display the suggestive display again. Occasionally, the suggestive display (FIG. 8-4 (M)) changes to a stage where the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than before erasing (80% as in FIG. 8-4 (I), etc.) 100%, etc.) can be displayed (100%, such as FIG. 8-4 (M), etc.), and a predetermined notification that it is not controlled to the advantageous state (FIG. 8-4 (J, etc.) 8-4 (J), etc.), it is possible to display it again after erasing the suggestive display (FIG. 8-4 (N), etc.). etc),
moreover,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, chance-up effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, chance-up effect determination processing shown in FIG. 10-2) a part that later executes the effect processing during variable display),
The suggestive effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effect, a special suggestive effect that notifies that the control is in the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the chance-up effect in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU -4), and as the special suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a first special suggestive effect and a second special suggestive effect in which the effect mode is different from the first special suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a part where the chance-up effect can be executed with pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4),
The ratio of executing the first special suggestion effect when being controlled to the advantageous state is the same ratio regardless of the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the pattern The portion where the determination ratio of CU-3 is 10% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1),
The rate at which the second special suggestion effect is executed when being controlled to the advantageous state differs according to the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(A), pattern CU-4 The determination ratio of is different depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the suggestive display again after once erasing it, and when the suggestive display is displayed again, there is a high degree of expectation that the suggestive display will be controlled to be in an advantageous state compared to before it was temporarily erased. Since it is possible to display suggestive displays that change in stages, the timing at which the suggestive displays change is unexpected, and when the suggestive displays are displayed again, it is expected that the suggestive displays will be controlled in a more advantageous state than before they were once erased. By displaying the suggestive display that has changed to a higher level, the interest in the game can be heightened. Further, even after the predetermined notification that the control to the advantageous state is not performed is given, the player's sense of anticipation for the advantageous state can be maintained. In addition, since the player can be made to pay attention to which of the first special suggestive effect and the second special suggestive effect is executed as the special suggestive effect, the interest in the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The suggestive display means, after a predetermined notification that the control to the advantageous state is not performed (such as notification of the result of the display of deviation as shown in FIG. 8-4 (J, etc.)), a special effect ( Roulette effect etc. as the special effect of (O)) is executed, and the suggestive display can be displayed again in relation to the execution of the special effect (FIG. 8-4 (M), etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to re-display the suggestive display in relation to the execution of the special effect after the predetermined notification that the control is not performed in the advantageous state, so that when the special effect is executed , it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation for the re-display of the suggestive display.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Predetermined effect means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (chance-up effect in FIGS. ),
The suggestive display means is capable of re-executing the predetermined effect executed before the suggestive display is erased once, when the suggestive display is restarted, and when the predetermined effect is executed, , it is possible to change the stage of the display mode in the suggestive display ([Example of effect in which the effect once executed before erasure is re-executed when the suggestive display is re-executed]).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to re-execute the predetermined effect executed before the suggestive display is erased once, when the suggestive display is restarted. Since the stage of the display mode in the suggestive display can be changed, the player's regret can be wiped away even when the predetermined effect is once executed and the control is not performed in an advantageous state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The suggestive display means can temporarily erase the suggestive display at a plurality of types of timing (first to third timings shown in (A) to (C) of FIG. 8-6, display, normal reach lost display, super reach lost display, etc.), the degree of expectation suggested by the re-displayed suggestive display changes depending on the timing when the suggestive display is once erased. The ratio is different (as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), for example, if the suggestion display 111F001 is once erased at the stage of the first SP reach out display and the stage of the second SP reach out display, the normal reach out display stage compared to the case where the suggestive display 111F001 is once erased in , when the suggestive display 111F001 is displayed again, the ratio of which stage of the suggestive display changes to 80% suggestive display and 100% suggestive display is different, etc.) .

According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation indicated by the re-displayed suggestive display varies depending on the timing at which the suggestive display is once erased, so that the suggestive display is once erased. It is possible to attract the player's attention at the timing of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
further comprising setting means (CPU 103, etc.) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The suggestive display means has a higher rate of change to the highest stage in the degree of expectation suggested by the re-displayed suggestive display as the set value set by the setting means is more advantageous to the player ([setting Effect example in which the more advantageous the value is to the player, the higher the rate of change in the level of expectation suggested by the re-displayed suggestive display to the highest stage]).

According to such a configuration, the more advantageous the set value set by the setting means is to the player, the higher the degree of expectation suggested by the re-displayed suggestive display changes to the highest level. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the re-display of the to boost interest.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to gaming machines of the following (6) to (13). Conventionally, in a game machine, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, and an advantageous state according to the set setting value There were some cases in which the proportions controlled to different levels were different, and an effect suggesting the set value could be executed. However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the suggestion of the setting value is not related to the result of the determination as to whether or not the control is to be performed in an advantageous state, so that the gaming interest cannot be improved. There is a demand for the provision of a game machine capable of improving the

(6) It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) that is advantageous to the player, and to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A configurable gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, chance-up effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, chance-up effect determination processing shown in FIG. 10-2) a part that later executes the effect processing during variable display),
The suggestive effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effect, a special suggestive effect that notifies that the control is in the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the chance-up effect in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU -4), and as the special suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a first special suggestive effect and a second special suggestive effect in which the effect mode is different from the first special suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a part where the chance-up effect can be executed with pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4),
The ratio of executing the first special suggestion effect when being controlled to the advantageous state is the same ratio regardless of the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the pattern The portion where the determination ratio of CU-3 is 10% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1),
The rate at which the second special suggestion effect is executed when being controlled to the advantageous state differs according to the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(A), pattern CU-4 The determination ratio of is different depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first special suggestive effect and the second special suggestive effect is to be executed as the special suggestive effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above,
When controlled to the advantageous state, the execution ratio of the special suggestion effect differs according to the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the variable display result is a big hit When determining the effect pattern of the chance-up effect based on this, the ratio determined in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio determined in the pattern CU-4 according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 parts with different totals)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the set value set in the gaming machine can be suggested to the player by the execution ratio of the special suggestive effect that informs that the control is in an advantageous state, so that the interest of the suggestive effect can be enhanced. can improve.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above,
It further comprises a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect at a different rate according to a set value during a predetermined period from when the special suggestive effect is executed until a predetermined condition is established (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-7 and FIG. 10-8, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance-up effect in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, depending on the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 Part that can execute set value suggestion production at different ratios)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which the set value is suggested by the execution ratio is executed in the predetermined period after the special suggestive effect is executed, the game interest in the predetermined period can be improved.

(9) In the gaming machine of (8) above,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing, as the predetermined effect, a special effect that corresponds to the special suggestive effect and has a different effect mode from the special suggestive effect (for example, a modification 129SG-1 shown in FIG. As shown in 10-11, after the performance control CPU 120 executes the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-3, the chance-up performance can be further executed in the pattern CU-4),
By executing the special suggestion effect and the special effect within a specific period, the player can specify that the set value is a part of a plurality of set values (for example, , as shown in FIG. 10-11 as a modification 129SG-1, the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 are executed twice during the variable display of the chance-up effect of 1, and set to the pachinko game machine 1. The part that can be specified that the set value is in the range of 4 to 6)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not some of the set values can be specified by executing the special suggestive effect and the special effect within the specific period. You can improve your interest.

(10) In the gaming machine of (8) above,
The predetermined effect execution means can execute a special effect corresponding to the special suggestive effect as the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. After the up effect is executed in pattern CU-3, the chance up effect can be further executed in pattern CU-4),
A player confirms that the set value is a part of a plurality of set values based on the total number of executions of the special suggestive effect and the number of executions of the special effect within a specific period. can be specified (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-11 as a modification 129SG-1, the chance-up effect is executed twice with pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4 during variable display of 1 The part that can specify that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the range of 4 to 6)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how many times the special suggestive effect and the special effect are executed within the specific period, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (10),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing, as the suggestive effect, a staged effect including a special stage effect that is a effect in which the effect mode changes in stages and is the special suggestive effect (for example, modification 129SG -2 as shown in FIG. 10-12, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the chance up effect),
The predetermined effect execution means is a stage effect following the special stage effect (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the fifth stage of the chance-up effect), and a specific set value is set. It is possible to execute the production of the specific set value suggestion stage that suggests that (for example, the part where the production control CPU 120 can execute the 6th stage of the chance up production)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the step effect changes to the specific set value suggesting step after the step effect changes to the special step, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(12) It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) that is advantageous to the player, and to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A configurable gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display effect process after executing the chance up effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-2) the part that executes
The suggestive effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effect, a specific suggestive effect that suggests that the rate of control to the advantageous state is high (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the chance-up effect as pattern CU-2. executable part),
The number of times the suggesting effect executing means executes the specific suggesting effect in a predetermined period differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. is executed three times in pattern CU-2, it means that 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, and the chance-up effect is executed once or twice in pattern CU-2. If any one of 1 to 5 is set as the setting value in the pachinko machine 1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of executions of the specific suggestive effect, so that the interest of the suggestive effect can be improved.

(13) It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) that is advantageous to the player, and to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A configurable gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display effect process after executing the chance up effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-2) the part that executes
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing a plurality of special suggestive effects for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the chance-up effect in pattern CU-3 or part executed in pattern CU-4),
The rate at which any one of the special suggestion effects is executed is the same regardless of the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-14 as modification 129SG-4, pattern CU-3 The sum of the decision ratio of pattern CU-4 and the decision ratio of pattern CU-4 is 15% regardless of the setting value set in pachinko game machine 1),
The execution ratio of any one of the special suggestion effects differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. The determination ratio of the pattern CU-4 is the part that differs according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the set value set in the gaming machine is suggested to the player by the execution ratio of at least one special suggestive effect among a plurality of special suggestive effects that notify that the control is in an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the suggestive production.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which illustrates the production|presentation control command in the characteristic part 111F. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control main process in the characteristic part 111F. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side game stop process in the characteristic part 111F. FIG. 10 is a display screen view of the image display device 5 showing an example of presentation of suggestive display in which the display mode can be changed in stages. It is a figure which shows a suggestion display presence/absence determination table. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a representative example of presentation timing of suggestive display; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of processing for determining effects during variable display; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect type during variable display; (A) is a diagram showing an effect (prediction of reach) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. FIG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of effects during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (low) presentation mode based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (high) presentation mode based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as Modified Example 1, and (B) is a diagram showing determination ratios of reach notice and setting suggestion when using effect type determination table C. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as a second embodiment, and (B) is a view showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at set values 1 and 6 with the fluctuation pattern normal reach, (B) is set with the fluctuation pattern super reach It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach and the setting value is 1 and setting value 6 in Example 3, and (B) is a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the setting value 1 and the setting value 6 in super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Example 4; FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as a fourth embodiment; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period at set value 1 and set value 6 with the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach in Example 4, (B) shows the fluctuation pattern A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 with normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 with super reach It is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of variable display effect type determination in the first period; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Modified Example 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period at set value 1 and set value 6 common to all variation patterns in modification 2, (B) is a variation pattern normal reach / super reach A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 in common, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach, setting values 1 and 6 at setting values 1 and 6 It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in 3 periods. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a chance up production|presentation determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation pattern of a chance up production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a chance up production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting value suggestion effect determination processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect pattern of setting value suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of an effect pattern of setting value suggesting effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing executable periods of the chance-up effect and the setting value suggestion effect; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a chance up production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of setting value suggestion production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the executable period of the chance up production|presentation in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution stage of the step-up production|presentation in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the executable period of the chance up production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of chance up production|presentation in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (ReadOnlyMemory) 101, a RAM (RandomAccessMemory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (VideoRAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 111F)
[Overview of Control of Characteristic Portion 111F]
Next, the characterizing part 111F of this embodiment will be described. As for the characterizing part 111F, a technique for a pachinko game machine capable of setting different set values, such as the probability of winning a big hit, having different degrees of advantage for the player by the setting means will be described as follows. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also has a function as setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player as the set value of the winning probability of the big win. .

First, setting values will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1 described in this example, the odds of winning a jackpot change depending on the set value when a person on the game hall side (such as a store clerk at the game hall) changes settings using operating means such as predetermined switches. It is configured.

For example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), a setting change process is executed to change the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value, the setting change process that allows the probability of winning the big hit to be changed is executed. The set values are, for example, three stages (multiple stages) from 1 to 6, and the probability of winning a big hit increases in the order of set value 1<set value 2<set value 3<set value 4<set value 5<set value 6. That is, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the degree of advantage increases in the order of setting value 2<setting value 3<setting value 4<setting value 5<setting value 6. increase step by step. It should be noted that the set values are not limited to six stages as long as they are provided in a plurality of stages. Since the ball output rate (the number of balls output per unit time (the number of prize balls)) changes in accordance with the possibility of changing the winning probability of the big hit in this way, changing the setting value changes the ball output rate. It can be said that

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the selection of the set value by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the six levels of setting values, for example, setting value 6 is called a high setting with a high probability of winning a big win, and setting value 1 is sometimes called a low setting with a low probability of winning a big win.

Also, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may be changed by setting the set values 1 to 6 in the same manner as the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may be changed by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6 as well as the winning probability of the big win. The selection probability of the variation pattern may be changed by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6 as well as the winning probability of the big win.

As for the characteristic portion 111F, in a pachinko game machine in which one of a plurality of set values can be set, a set value is suggested as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a setting means. A control example for executing a setting value suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as a setting value suggestion effect) will be described. As the setting suggestion effect, a setting change suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as a setting change suggestion effect) that suggests that the setting value has been changed (setting change processing has been executed at startup) is executed. good too.

Regarding the characteristic part 111F, during the variable display of the decorative patterns, the rotation number counter (the number of variable display times from when the power is turned on or when the previous big win game state ends to when a new big win occurs) is displayed in the display area of the decorative patterns. A specific display such as an image of a counting counter) can be executed, and the specific display can be displayed in a specific mode corresponding to a notice effect such as a big hit notice as a notice suggesting that the game will be controlled to a big win game state. In addition, an example will be described in which the specific display can be displayed in a special mode corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, and the specific display can be displayed with a display priority different from the display of the decorative pattern.

[Structure of Command of Characteristic Portion 111F]
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control commands used in the characterizing portions 111F and 103F. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 8B is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-1, the command 8001H is the first variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern designation command that designates a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In addition, in the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variation pattern or the like.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 of FIG. 8-1. In the game state specifying command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 8-1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1. In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the number of special figure reserved memories so that the image display device 5 or the like can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number, in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command in the RAM 122 . The RAM 122 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is partially or wholly stopped. backed-up memory. The set value data stored in the RAM 122 is updated when the effect control CPU 120 side receives a set value designation command. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can constantly recognize the current set value based on the data stored in the RAM 122 . The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 8-1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that a setting value change operation has started in the pachinko game machine 1 (that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in the setting value change state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in the setting value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

Command F1XXH and Command F2XXH. These commands are effect control commands that indicate the contents of winning determination results such as jackpot type determination and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Among them, the command F1XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will be made and the judgment result of the type of the big win among the winning determination results. Also, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results.

The command F1XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will be made and the judgment result of the type of the big win among the results of determination at the time of winning. Also, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results.

[Processing based on fluctuation pattern specification command]
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing the variation display of the decorative pattern to be displayed. In addition, in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbols, the image display device 5 may be provided with a regular small pattern in which the decoration pattern is reduced. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing variable display of the small symbols to be displayed at all times.

[Production control main processing]
Next, the production control main processing executed in the characteristic portion 111F will be described. FIG. 8-2 is a flow chart showing the effect control main processing in the characterizing section 111F. In FIG. 8-2, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and also has a CTC (counter/ (timer circuit) registers, etc.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception wait timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception wait timer times out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed and waits until the command reception wait timer times out.

When the command reception wait timer times out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player is After accepting the input of information, information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When there is no reception of the hot start notification command (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the cold notification command (207SGS408). When there is reception of the cold notification command (207SGS408; Y), the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM 122 since the previous startup of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of (207SGS409), and notifies that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared and that the player information and performance information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. (207SGS410) RAM clear notification processing for (executing RAM clear notification). In the RAM clear notification process, the image display on the image display device 5, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko game machine 1 is started. It is only necessary to inform the store clerk or the like of the game parlor that the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

Moreover, when there is no reception of the cold start notification command (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). If the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the setting value is changed. A setting value related notification process for notifying that an operation is in progress (setting value changing notification) or that a setting value is being checked (setting value checking notification) is executed (207SGS412). In the setting value related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting change value is being changed and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After executing the set value related notification process in 207SGS412, the sub-side game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when an effect control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop the game. Processing is performed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 8-3.

After the sub-side game stop processing is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). If the setting value change end notification command or setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), proceed to 207SGS412. ) goes to 207 SGS427.

When there is no reception of the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command at 207SGS411 (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command is received (207SGS425). If an error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), an error notification process (207SGS426) is executed to notify an error indicated by the error designation command. If an error designation command is not received (207SGS425; N) , 207 SGS 403 .

When proceeding to 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which one of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received. The display of the initial pattern corresponding to the received command is started. For example, if the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, if a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 2, display of decoration patterns is started by a combination of "1", "2" and "3" from the left as initial patterns. Also, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays the initial symbol " 4”, “5”, and “6” are combined to start displaying the decoration pattern.

In addition, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. A combination of "4", "5" and "6" may be displayed as the initial pattern at a higher rate than when the set value is set (for example, "1"). By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko game machine 1 is set with setting values that are advantageous to the player, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, when there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko game machine 1, a set value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set, and a set value that is disadvantageous to the player is set. The initial pattern displayed on the image display device 5 may be different between when the value (for example, "1") is set. Also, when a set value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set and when a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the sound to be output, the light intensity of the game effect lamp 9, etc. may be varied.

Next, in order to restrict the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the first 4 fluctuations, "4" is set in the pre-reading regulation counter (207SGS428). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processes.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes start notification processing for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (207SGS431). In the start notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . If it is the first interruption from the startup of the pachinko game machine 1, it identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, It selects the activation notification process table corresponding to the received command and starts the activation notification process timer corresponding to the received command. After starting the start-notifying process timer, the pachinko game machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-notifying process timer and the start-notifying process table by executing start-notifying processing in subsequent interrupts. Notification should be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is either a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. Depending on the presence, the mode of start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is different. For example, when a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and output of the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds are executed. The timing for starting light emission of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the timing for starting output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. It may be different from the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when no new setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The timing for starting light emission of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the timing for starting output of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

The specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Includes both executing output.

Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, if the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Then, the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed). The timing for starting light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the timing for starting outputting the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the timing for starting displaying the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, the setting value change end notification command is received, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. In contrast, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

In addition, although a mode is illustrated in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is performed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a game hall management computer or each machine counter, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the external output A signal that can specify that the pachinko game machine 1 has started may be output from the terminal to the management device.

In addition, even when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state, the device for executing start notification is partially common (game effect lamp 9 light emission and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R), but the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on which of the setting confirmation states it was started, the device that executes the start notification differs (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the pachinko When the gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, a signal may be output from the external output terminal described above to the management device, etc.).

In addition, depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state, the notification mode in each device that executes start notification may be changed. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In some cases, only some of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 may be illuminated.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the frame for the game machine is open, so the sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (the pachinko game machine 1 If more than one speaker is installed, only some of the speakers output sound), and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the game machine frame is closed. Therefore, sound may be output from all speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting changing", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When the program is started by the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 have been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared."

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals, the terminal for outputting a signal to the management device may be changed according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the setting value is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received) is displayed as the setting value changing notification. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over the period), and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as RAM clear notification. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, it is only necessary to output a signal from a terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear to the management device as RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be varied according to each notification.

As described above, in the start-up notification process, a form in which the start-up notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs according to the received command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 may be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. Further, the pachinko game machine 1 start-up notification is exemplified in a form in which it is executed when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command is received. , the present invention is not limited to this, and among these hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value confirmation end notification command, setting value change end notification command, even if it is received, the pachinko game machine 1 A command that does not execute activation notification may be provided.

In addition, as an initialization effect, a different mode of startup notification is executed according to the command received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, or a different combination is executed according to the command received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started. The decoration patterns may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the mode of activation notification and the combination of the decoration patterns as these initialization effects are all different according to the command received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started. may be the same, or only a portion may be the same.

In addition, examples are given of the form in which the start notification is executed in any of the cases where the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start or when it is started in the setting confirmation state, these start-up notifications may not be executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a power-off detection process (207SGS432). In the power-off detection process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value. If there is no input of the power-off signal, the process is terminated, and if there is an input of the power-off signal, backup data including setting value information, player information, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is specified, and the specified backup data is specified. Backup data is stored in a backup data storage area provided in RAM 122 . Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area, the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by interrupt processing based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122 . In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 8-1) is the effect control command saved in the buffer area.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process processing, the display control of the image display device 5 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) among the processes corresponding to the control state.

Next, production random number update processing (207SGS435) for updating the count value of the counter for generating production random numbers such as jackpot symbol determination random numbers (207SGS435), player information input processing (207SGS436) for accepting input of player information, game A player information output process (207SGS437) for outputting player information, and an effect information totalization process (207SGS438) for totalizing effect information are executed. After that, the process proceeds to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a password (a password generated by an external server in which the game information of the player is stored in advance) by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone, receives the generated password), and stores player information specified from the password in the RAM 122 . Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big wins, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored each time the variation display, the big win game, and the super reach.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and generates the two-dimensional code. is displayed on the image display device 5 . After the two-dimensional code is displayed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a portable terminal such as a smart phone, and transmits the player information collected in the current game to an external server. 1 can be stored in the server.

In the production information tallying process, the production control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as information for production each time a variation display, a big hit game, and a super reach are executed. do.

[Sub-side game stop processing]
FIG. 8-2 is a flow chart showing sub-side game stop processing executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command is received (40FS010). If it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 by discarding the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby displaying the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. It is possible to prevent the execution of controls that do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command is received. If it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 by discarding the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent the execution of controls that do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby controlling the variable display of decorative patterns and the constant variable display of small patterns by operating the image display device 5. can be prevented from running. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer, and determines whether or not the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is received. If it is determined that the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds during the jackpot game state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can prevent it from running. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning hole designation command is received. When it is determined that the first starting winning hole designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first starting winning hole designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to display the pending display of the first pending information by operating the image display device 5. can do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning hole designation command is received. If it is determined that the command for specifying the second start winning opening has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second starting winning hole designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to display the pending display of the second pending information by operating the image display device 5. can do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the symbol designation command is received. If it is determined that the design designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the design designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby making it possible not to execute the win-time flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp. Further, the effect control CPU 120 cancels the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby preventing execution of the winning pending change effect by operating the image display device 5.例文帳に追加. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation type designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the variation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to execute the win-time flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent execution of the pending change effect at the time of winning by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the test command is received. Here, the test command is a command that is sent directly to the effect control board 12 from a command sending device for checking the state of the screen and the state of the character that is provided in the game machine at the time of factory shipment. . When transmitting test commands, various test commands are transmitted in a state in which a transmission device dedicated to test command transmission is connected to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. If it is determined that the test command has been received, control according to the test command is executed even during the setting change state or setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on receiving a test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this manner, processing based on the reception of the test command is executed even during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, commands as shown in FIG. 8-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the processing ends. If it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from executing the effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

[Effect obtained by sub-side game stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 8-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command when it is controlled in the setting change state, so that the variation pattern specification command Do not perform receive-based control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state. Do not perform receive-based control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command when being controlled in the setting change state. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command when being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening open specification command even if it receives the special winning opening open specification command when it is controlled in the setting change state. Control based on the reception of the specified command during the opening of the special prize opening is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening open designation command even if it receives the special winning opening open designation command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state. Control based on the reception of the specified command during the opening of the special prize opening is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command while being controlled in the setting change state. Since the mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start prize mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Since the mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start prize mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when it is controlled in the setting change state. Do not execute control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent malfunction of predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state. Do not execute control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent malfunction of predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but then discards the received command like 40FS021. In this way, even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning. Further, since information is not left by discarding the received command, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is terminated, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in Fig. 8-3, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, setting is made to display an image notifying the setting change state, and the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. to display an image notifying that the setting confirmation state is set. In this way, it is possible to indicate that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled, and even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5, etc. It is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning.

As indicated by 40FS020 in FIG. 8-3, even when the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, control according to the test command is executed. In this way, the operation of the predetermined rendering means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command can be executed even when the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

[Example of presentation of suggestive display in which the display mode changes in stages]
Next, with respect to the characteristic portion 111F, an effect of performing a suggestive display capable of suggesting the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state by changing the gradual display mode (gradual display mode such as numerical value display and level display). An example is given. In this production example, an example of using a so-called meter display is shown as an example of the suggestive display. The meter display is an image that displays the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state by a numerical value and a level gauge display, and displays the level of the degree of expectation. This is a display suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation to be made.

FIG. 8-4 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of a suggestive display effect in which the display mode can be changed in stages. FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (P) show the production, etc., from the time when the variable display of decorative patterns starts to change, through the execution of the first suggestive display, until the temporarily erased suggestive display is displayed again. It is

In FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F), after the variable display of the decorative pattern (special pattern) starts to fluctuate, the suggestive display is executed, the production state develops to the first SP production, and the first SP production is executed. is shown. FIGS. 8-4 (G) and (H) show a state in which the rendering state develops to the third SP rendering due to mission success (task achievement) in the first SP rendering. Figures 8-4 (I) to (P) show a case in which the variable display result is temporarily lost due to mission failure (task failure) in the first SP effect, and then the suggestive display is displayed again. A rendering state and a rendering state in which the suggestive display is not displayed again are shown.

As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5, left, middle and right decorative patterns are displayed corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern. Variation of the variable display of the left, middle, and right decoration patterns in areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started. A downward arrow in the drawing indicates that the decorative pattern is changing.

When it is decided to execute the effect of suggestive display in the variable display, as shown in FIG. In the area on the left side of 5L, 5C and 5R, display of suggestive display 111F001 consisting of an image capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win gaming state in a meter display format is started.

The suggestive display 111F001 includes a numerical display portion 111F002 that displays a meter by numerical display (% display) and a level gauge display (color display of gauge blocks divided into 5) for meter display (displayable up to 100% in increments of 20%). and a level display portion 111F003 that displays the same level of expectation on both the numerical value display portion 111F002 and the level display portion 111F003. Note that the suggestive display 111F001 may be composed of only the numerical display portion 111F002, or may be composed of only the level display portion 111F003.

The suggestive display 111F001 is an image that suggests the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state by means of a meter display, and it is possible to display 0% to 100%, but even if 0% is displayed, the big win game state is displayed. , and even if 100% is displayed, it may be controlled to the jackpot game state. In this way, the suggestive display 111F001 displays an estimate of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, as the suggestive display 111F001, an effect may be produced such that, when 100% is displayed, it is determined that the game state is controlled to the big win game state. In addition, the suggestion display 111F001 indicates whether or not the production control state progresses to a state where the expectation of being controlled to the big hit game state is high in addition to the expectation of being controlled to the big win game state (for example, whether or not the expectation degree of the big hit is It may also indicate the degree of expectation of transition to a high SP effect, etc.). Further, the suggestive display 111F001 may indicate the degree of expectation as to whether or not the ready-to-win state will occur in addition to the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state. Further, the suggestive display 111F001 may indicate the degree of expectation of whether or not the super ready-to-win state will be achieved in the ready-to-win state, in addition to the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state. In addition, the suggestion display 111F001 is a so-called step-up effect, in which the expectation level of a big win increases as the effect state steps up step by step in addition to the expectation level controlled to the big win game state. It may indicate the degree of expectation as to whether or not it will be upgraded.

For example, in the variable display of the variation pattern that develops into the 1st SP effect, a character image 111F005 is displayed climbing a slope image 111F004, and a mission (task) is displayed with characters such as "If you finish climbing, you have a great chance." A mission explanation image 111F006 to explain is displayed. At that time, characters "SP1 development" are displayed to indicate that the game has progressed to the first SP effect. Such an image display suggests that the character image 111F005 climbs up the slope image 111F004, and that the player has a high degree of expectation for a big win game state.

For example, in the first SP effect, as shown in FIG. A chance-up effect is executed in which the level gauge of the level display portion 111F003 rises to 20%.

When the character image 111F005 further climbs the second section on the slope image 111F004 as shown in FIG. , a chance-up effect is executed in which a star-shaped image 111F008 is displayed below the slope image 111F004, and accordingly, the meter display (numerical value and level gauge) is increased to 40% in the suggestive display 111F001.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8-4(F), when the character image 111F005 further climbs the third section on the slope image 111F004, a chance up image 111F007 consisting of characters such as "CHANCE UP+20" is displayed. , a chance-up effect is executed in which a star-shaped image 111F008 is additionally displayed below the slope image 111F004, and in accordance with this, the meter display (numerical value and level gauge) is increased to 60% in the suggestive display 111F001.

Thus, in the suggestive display 111F001, in response to the execution of the chance-up effect, the meter display (numerical value and level gauge) is executed to increase the level display of the degree of expectation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-4(G), when the character image 111F005 climbs the slope image 111F004, the meter display (numerical value and level gauge) increases to 100% in the suggestive display 111F001 accordingly. is displayed. Then, an image of characters "Success!!" is displayed, and an effect is performed to notify that the character image 111F005 has climbed the slope image 111F004. Next, when the variation pattern develops from the first SP effect to the third SP effect, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (H), "Development!!
A character image such as "SP3" is displayed to notify that the effect state has developed to the third SP effect, and the third SP effect in which the character image 111F005 performs a battle effect is started.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-4(I), when the character image 111F005 cannot climb the slope image 111F004 and falls on the way, the meter display (numerical value and level gauge) exceeds 60% in the suggestive display 111F001. There is no indication that the Then, an image of characters "failed!" is displayed, and an effect is performed to notify that the character image 111F005 could not climb the slope image 111F004.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-4(J), all the images displayed so far including the suggestive display 111F001 are erased, the decorative pattern is moved to the central portion and enlarged and displayed, and as a result of the deviated display, a temporary Stop. However, after that, as shown in FIG. 8-4(K), the decorative pattern resulting from the display of the error is reduced in size and moved to the upper right corner for display, and the characters "Roulette Chance!" appear in the center of the display area. A roulette image 111F009 showing an image and a character image reading "SP will grow if SP stops at fingertip", along with display options for effects "x", "SP2", and "SP3", and fingertips. A fingertip image 111F010 is displayed, and as a special effect, execution of a roulette effect is started in which a progress pattern of the effect is selected according to the game result of the roulette game.

The "x" in the roulette image 111F009 means that the variable display ends without developing the effect. "SP2" in the roulette image 111F009 means that the game will develop into the second SP effect. "SP3" in the roulette image 111F009 indicates that the game will develop into the third SP effect.

After that, in the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (L), a state in which the roulette image 111F009 rotates is displayed, and after a specific time of about 3 seconds has elapsed, the As shown in -4(O), an image in which the roulette image 111F009 stops is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (N) or FIG. 8-4 (P), in a state where the roulette image 111F009 is stopped, the position of the fingertip image 111F010 is selected from "x", "SP2", and "SP3". An effect corresponding to the option stopped by is then executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(M), when the portion indicating the SP effect such as "SP3" in the roulette image 111F009 stops at the position of the fingertip image 111F010, it is determined that the selected SP effect will develop. , for example, by displaying a character image such as "SP3 development!" be.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (M), the suggestion display 111F001 that was once erased in FIG. is displayed again. As shown in Fig. 8-4 (M), when the suggestive display 111F001 is displayed again, the meter display (numerical value and level gauge) will be higher (80% or higher) than before it was once erased (60% or lower). The image shown is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (N), the roulette image 111F009 is erased, and the execution of the development destination SP effect (the third SP effect in this example) is started. starts re-fluctuation in the form of changing from the temporary stop state to the ready-to-reach state.When the SP effect of the development destination is executed, the suggestive display 111F001 is erased.It should be noted that the SP effect of the development destination is executed. Also, the suggestive display 111F001 may be continuously displayed without being erased.

In this way, when the effect in which it is decided that the roulette effect develops into the SP effect (the effect in which the roulette image 111F009 SP effect segment stops at the position of the fingertip image 111F010) is executed, the suggestive display 111F001 that has been temporarily erased is displayed. Since it can be displayed again, the effect determined to develop into the SP effect in the roulette effect is called "re-display determined effect of suggestive display".

In addition, from the rotation state of the roulette image 111F009 shown in FIG. 8-4(L), the roulette image 111F009 stops as shown in FIG. Sometimes, as shown in FIG. 8-4(P), the roulette image 111F009 is erased, and the decoration pattern stopped as a result of the display of the error is moved to the central portion and enlarged and displayed, and the display result is confirmed.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (G) and (M), when the meter display (numerical value and level gauge) of the suggestive display 111F001 reaches 100%, the suggestive display 111F001 is enlarged, and the image of the meter display You may perform the production which stands out.

In addition, the re-display after erasing the suggestive display 111F001 is not the timing of the second half of the roulette effect as shown in FIG. It can be executed in time. In that case, at the stage where the options for the roulette effect are displayed as shown in FIG. You can let it be.

In addition, the above-mentioned roulette effect is not limited to the timing of temporary stop due to the display result of missing decorative symbols, for example, the start timing of the ready-to-win state, the timing during execution of the ready-to-win state, and the timing of stopping the symbol indicating the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run. , and may be executed at other timings such as before reaching the reach state.

Of the effects described above, the effect of the suggestive display 111F001 can be displayed again after the suggestive display 111F001 is temporarily erased. Since the suggestive display 111F001 can be changed to a stage where the degree of expectation is controlled to the big win game state is high, the timing of the change of the suggestive display 111F001 is unexpected, and the interest in the game can be heightened. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-4(J), the suggestive display 111F001 is displayed after the predetermined notification that the control to the jackpot game state is not performed due to the temporary stop due to the display result of the decorative pattern being removed, and then the heresy is erased. , can be displayed again as shown in FIG. 8-4(M). As a result, the player's expectation for the big-hit game state can be maintained even after the predetermined notification that the control to the big-hit game state is not performed is given.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (J), the suggestive display 111F001 is not controlled to the big hit game state due to the temporary stop due to the display result of the decorative symbol being removed, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (J). Like K) to (M), it is possible to display again in relation to the execution of a special effect such as a roulette effect. As a result, the suggestive display 111F001 can be displayed again in relation to the execution of the special performance after the predetermined notification to the effect that the control to the jackpot game state is not performed, so that the suggestive display can be performed when the special performance is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the re-display of 111F001.

[Example of data table for determining whether or not suggestive display 111F001 is executed in variable display]
Next, various data, which is a data table used for executing the effect of the suggestive display 111F001, is used to determine how to enable the suggestive display 111F001, which is temporarily erased and then redisplayed as shown in FIG. 8-4. It explains using a table. Various data described below are stored in the ROM 121 .

FIG. 8-5A is a diagram showing a suggestive display presence/absence determination table. The suggestive display presence/absence determination table is a table for determining whether or not to execute the suggestive display 111F001 effect.

In the suggestive display presence/absence determination table, the effect that the effect control CPU 120 updates for each variation pattern of "non-reach", "normal reach", first super reach", "second super reach" and "third super reach" Of the random numbers, the extracted value of the random number SR2 (0 to 0299 numerical range) for determining whether or not the suggestive display effect is executed, which is used to determine whether the suggestive display 111F001 effect is to be executed, and The selection relationship with each of "no effect execution" is shown. FIG. 8-5(A) shows how many of the 300 numerical data of 0 to 0299 are allocated for the execution/non-execution of suggestive display effects in SR2. In FIG. 8-5(A), when the variable display is executed, using the table data corresponding to the variation pattern executed this time, based on the extracted value of SR2, suggestive display 111F001 shown in FIG. 8-4 execution is determined.

In FIG. 8-5 (A), the ratio of selecting to execute the suggestive display 111F001 is set as data in the relationship of "3rd super reach>2nd super reach>1st super reach>normal reach>non-reach>" there is Among these variation patterns, "non-reach" is a variable display variation pattern that does not result in reach.

Regarding these variation patterns, the order in which the ratio of selection when the result is a big hit display result to the time when the display result is lost is "3rd Super Reach>2nd Super Reach>1st Super Reach>Normal Reach>Non- Reach>”. Therefore, the suggestive display 111F001 is more likely to be displayed when the big win display result is displayed than when the variable display is not displayed. Thus, when the suggestive display 111F001 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is higher than when the suggestive display 111F001 is not executed, so the player's expectation can be enhanced.

In this way, the suggestive display 111F001 can be displayed again after being erased once as shown in FIG. 8-4(J), and the suggestive display 111F001 can be displayed again as shown in FIG. When doing so, it is possible to make a suggestive display 111F001 that has changed to a stage where the degree of expectation for being controlled to the big win game state is higher than before the erasure.

[Data table example for selecting the type of effect when executing suggestive display effect with variable display]

FIG. 8-5(B) is a diagram showing a suggestive display effect type selection table. The suggestive display effect type selection table is a table for selecting the type of effect when executing the suggestive display 111F001 effect.

In the suggestive display effect type selection table, the effect control CPU 120 updates the variation patterns of "non-reach", "normal reach", first super reach", "second super reach" and "third super reach". Of the effect random numbers, the selection relationship between the extracted value of the suggestive display effect type selection random number SR3 (0 to 0209 numerical range) used for determining whether the suggestive display 111F001 effect is executed and the various suggestive display effect types. The allocation is indicated by the number of SR3s.

As the types of suggestive display effects, (1) an effect that does not develop from a non-reach temporary stop state to an SP effect, (2) an effect that does not develop from a normal reach out of temporary stop state to an SP effect, (3) first SP reach out. Effect that does not develop from the temporary stop state to the SP effect, (4) Effect that develops from the non-reachable temporary stop state to the second SP effect (SP2), and is once erased and then re-displayed "80%" in the suggestive display 111F001. (5) This is an effect that develops from a temporary stop state in which the normal reach is lost to a second SP effect (SP2), which is temporarily erased and then displayed again with a suggestive display 111F001 that displays "80%" on the meter. Effect, (6) Effect that develops from a temporary stop state where the 1st SP reach is out of reach to the 2nd SP effect (SP2). 7) An effect that develops from the temporary stop state of non-reach loss to the third SP effect (SP3), and is temporarily erased and then redisplayed with a suggestive display 111F001 that displays "100%" on the meter, (8) Normal reach loss. 111F001, which is an effect that develops from the temporary stop state to the 3rd SP effect (SP3), and is temporarily erased and then displayed again with a suggestive display 111F001 that displays "100%" on the meter; 111F001, which is an effect that develops from the state to the third SP effect (SP3), and is temporarily erased and then redisplayed, with a suggestive display 111F001 that displays "100%" on the meter, and (10) a temporary stop state where the second SP reach is out 111F001, which is an effect that develops from the 3rd SP effect (SP3), and is displayed once again after being erased, the effect of displaying "100%" on the meter can be selected.

The meanings of main terms in the description of the suggestive display effect types are as follows. A non-reach loss is a combination of losing symbols without being in a reach state. Loss of normal reach is a combination of symbols out of the ready-to-win production state. The 1st SP ready-to-win loss is a combination of symbols out of the ready-to-win effect state of the 1st SP effect. The 2nd SP ready-to-win loss is a combination of symbols out of the ready-to-win effect state of the 2nd SP effect. The 3rd SP ready-to-win loss is a combination of symbols out of the ready-to-win effect state of the 3rd SP effect.

The first SP effect is basically the SP effect executed in the variation pattern of the first super ready-to-win, but it may also be executed as a ready-to-win effect before developing to the second SP effect or the third SP effect. The second SP effect is basically an SP effect executed in the variation pattern of the second super reach, but it may also be executed as a reach effect before developing to the third SP effect. The 3rd SP effect is basically an SP effect executed in the variation pattern of the 3rd super reach, and is basically a variation pattern with a higher ratio of selection when a big hit display result is obtained compared to other SP effects. Since it is an effect to be executed, it is not used as a ready-to-win effect to be executed as a pre-effect that develops into another effect.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in the fluctuation patterns of "non-reach", "normal reach" and "first super reach", only effects that do not develop into SP effects are selected. As shown in FIG. 8-5(B), the “second super reach” can select an effect that develops into a second SP effect, and when the suggestive display 111F001 once erased is displayed again, the “80%” It is possible to select the production to display the meter. As shown in FIG. 8-5(B), the “3rd Super Reach” can select an effect that develops into a 3rd SP effect. It is possible to select the production to display the meter. In this way, the "third super reach" is a super reach with a high expectation of a big hit compared to the "second super reach", so the meter display when the suggestive display 111F001 once erased is displayed again. Since the level is set higher than the level of the meter display at the time of the "second super reach", the player's expectation for the big win can be further heightened.

In each effect shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is used as the effect mode related to the suggestion display 111F001, such as the number of executions of the chance-up effect in the suggestion display 111F001 to be executed and the execution timing. A corresponding presentation mode is determined in advance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), for example, if the suggestion display 111F001 is once erased at the stage of the first SP reach out display and the stage of the second SP reach out display, the suggestion at the stage of the normal reach out display When the suggestive display 111F001 is re-displayed, the ratio of the step between the suggestive display of 80% and the suggestive display of 100% is different compared to when the display 111F001 is once erased.

As described above, before the suggestive display 111F001 is once erased, the meter display is "60%" or less, and when the suggestive display 111F001 is displayed again, "80%", "100%", etc. will be temporarily erased. By performing the suggestive display 111F001 changed to a stage where the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big hit game state is higher than before, the interest in the game can be heightened.

In addition, in FIG. 8-5 (B), a suggestive indication that the SP effect develops from the effect of displaying "80%" or "100%" on the meter when the first SP reach is lost and the second SP reach is lost. In addition to the effect, a suggestive display effect of a type that can develop the SP effect from the effect of displaying a % value of less than 80% with a meter may be provided. In addition, in the case where the SP effect develops according to the meter display value from the temporary stop state of the decoration symbol such as the first SP reach loss and the second SP reach loss, for example, the meter display in the state of the second SP reach loss When the value is ``100%'' than when the value is ``80%'', the expectation for a big hit is higher, so that the expectation for a big hit will differ according to the meter display value when the SP production develops. can be

[Example of a data table for selecting the timing for redisplaying a suggestive display after erasing it once]

FIG. 8-5(C) is a diagram showing a suggested display restart timing selection table. The suggestive display re-start timing selection table is a data table used to select and determine the timing for re-displaying the suggestive display 111F001 once erased, as shown in FIG. 8-4(M).

In the suggested display re-display start timing selection table, the suggested display 111F001 once erased is displayed again for each of the "big hit" and "loss", and the suggested display "1 second after re-display decision effect" Elapsed time", suggestive display "3 seconds after re-display determination effect", suggestive display "5 seconds after re-display determination effect" can be selected. In the suggestive display redisplay start timing selection table, among the effect random numbers updated by the effect control CPU 120, a suggestive display redisplay start timing selection random number SR4 (0 to 0399) used for selecting the suggestive display redisplay start timing is selected. Numerical range) and the type of timing for re-displaying the suggestive display 111F001 that has been erased.

In the suggestive display redisplay start timing selection table, the suggestive display redisplay start timing is, for example, a redisplay decision effect (roulette When the image 111F009SP effect segment stops at the position of the fingertip image 111F010), a plurality of types of elapsed times such as 1 second, 3 seconds, and 5 seconds are provided.

In the suggestive display redisplay start timing selection table, the extracted value of SR4 and the suggestive display redisplay start timing are selected so that the ratio of selecting a longer elapsed time in the case of "jackpot" is higher than in the case of "loss". is shown by the number of SR4s. As a result, the longer the time until the suggestion display 111F001 is displayed again after the re-display determination effect in which the SP effect is selected as shown in FIG. Expectations are higher.

In addition, in the suggested display redisplay start timing selection table, the data was set so that the ratio of selecting a longer elapsed time for "at the time of the big hit" is higher than at the time of "at the time of loss", but on the contrary, The data may be set so that the rate of selecting a shorter elapsed time for "time" is higher than for "time of failure". In that case, the longer the time until the suggestion display 111F001 is displayed again after the re-display determination effect in which the SP effect is selected as shown in FIG. Expectations to be controlled by

It should be noted that the timing of starting the redisplay of the suggestive display is not limited to the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the redisplay determination effect is executed, but may be the timing that matches the execution timing of the redisplay determination effect. Moreover, the timing may be matched with the generation timing of a specific advance notice effect.

[Example of suggestive display effect setting and example of effect execution]
Next, using the suggestive display presence/absence determination table, the suggestive display effect type selection table, and the suggestive display redisplay start timing selection table shown in FIG. , explain whether to execute the suggestive display effect.

In the effect control CPU 120, in response to receiving the variation pattern command, when executing the variable display of the decorative pattern, in the variable display start setting process of S171 of FIG. By checking the data of the variation pattern command, the type of variation pattern to be executed is confirmed, SR2 is extracted, and the suggestive display 111F001 production is performed using the suggestive display presence/absence determination table in FIG. 8-5 (A). Determine whether to execute or not.

Then, when it is determined not to execute the effect of the suggestive display 111F001, in the variable display start setting process of S171 of FIG. Select and set the data for

On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the effect of the suggestive display 111F001, in the variable display start setting process of S171 of FIG. select data for Next, the type of variation pattern of the variable display to be executed this time is confirmed, SR3 is extracted, and the suggestive display to be executed in the variable display this time by using the suggestive display effect type selection table shown in FIG. 8-5(B). Select and decide the type of production. Furthermore, in the variable display start setting process of S171 of FIG. By confirming the data, the display result of the variable display to be executed (big hit, lose) is confirmed, SR4 is extracted, and the suggestion is made using the suggestion display re-display start timing selection table of FIG. 8-5 (C). The start timing for re-displaying the display 111F001 is selected and determined.

Based on various determination items related to the effect of the suggestive display 111F001, the effect control CPU 120 determines with what effect pattern the effect of the suggestive display 111F001 is to be executed, and performs the effect of the suggestive display 111F001 with the determined effect pattern. Effect control data for executing the effect is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.例文帳に追加Then, after the variable display is started, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect processing during variable display in S172 of FIG. The effect of display 111F001 is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to execute an effect using the suggestive display 111F001 as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example.

[Example of production timing of suggestion display 111F001]
Next, a representative example of rendering timing of the suggestive display 111F001 will be described using a timing chart. FIG. 8-6 is a timing chart showing a representative example of rendering timing of the suggestive display 111F001. In each of FIGS. 8-6 (A) to (C), the variable display state of the decoration pattern and the meter display state of the suggestive display 111F001 are shown according to the passage of time.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows an example of the first timing of suggestive display effect, and specifically, develops from non-reach out of FIG. 8-5(B) to SP effect such as SP2 effect or SP3 effect. It shows a production control pattern.

In FIG. 8-6(A), the suggestive display 111F001 is executed while the variable display that does not enter the reach state is executed, but the non-reach lost symbols are temporarily stopped and the suggestive display 111F001 is temporarily erased. After that, the execution of the roulette effect described above is started, and as a result of the roulette effect, it is decided that the SP effect will develop, and the suggestive display 111F001 is started to be displayed again one second after the effect result of the roulette effect is determined. . Then, according to the effect result of the roulette effect, the execution of the SP effect is started.

FIG. 8-6(B) shows an example of the second timing of suggestive display effect, specifically, an effect that develops from normal reach out of FIG. 8-5(B) to SP effect such as SP2 effect or SP3 effect. It shows a control pattern.

In FIG. 8-6(B), the suggestive display 111F001 was executed during the execution of the variable display not in the ready-to-reach state and during the execution of the variable display in the normal reach state. is deleted once. After that, the execution of the roulette effect described above is started, and as a result of the roulette effect, it is decided that the SP effect will develop, and the suggestive display 111F001 is started to be displayed again 3 seconds after the effect result of the roulette effect is determined. . Then, according to the effect result of the roulette effect, the execution of the SP effect is started.

FIG. 8-6(C) shows an example of the third timing of suggestive display effect, and specifically shows the effect control pattern that develops from the 1st SP reach out of FIG. 8-5(B) to the SP2 effect. be.

In FIG. 8-6(C), the suggestive display 111F001 was executed during the execution of the variable display that does not enter the ready-to-win state to the normal ready-to-win state and the variable display in the first SP effect, but the ready-to-win state is temporarily stopped. , the suggestive display 111F001 is temporarily erased. After that, the execution of the roulette effect described above is started, and as a result of the roulette effect, it is decided that the second SP effect will be developed, and the suggestive display 111F001 is started to be displayed again 5 seconds after the effect result of the roulette effect is determined. there is Execution of the second SP effect is started according to the effect result of the roulette effect.

As shown in FIGS. 8-6(A) to 8-6(C), there are provided a plurality of timings of temporary erasing and re-display timings for rendering the suggestive display 111F001 once erased and then redisplayed. Further, when the roulette effect is executed after the temporary stop of the decorative symbols, a plurality of types of start timings of the effect for redisplaying the suggestive display 111F001 are also provided. In this manner, the effect of temporarily erasing the suggestive display 111F001 and then displaying it again has a variety of effect control timings, and can improve the fun of the effect.

In addition, suggested display 111F001, such as when non-reach out of reach display, normal reach out of reach display, super reach out of display, etc., shown in the first to third timings of (A) to (C) of FIG. 8-6 can be erased once at a plurality of timings. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), for example, if the suggestion display 111F001 is once erased at the first SP reach out display stage and the second SP reach out display stage, the suggestion at the normal reach out display stage When the suggestive display 111F001 is re-displayed, the ratio of the step between the suggestive display of 80% and the suggestive display of 100% is different compared to when the display 111F001 is once erased. As a result, depending on the timing at which the suggestive display 111F001 is once erased, the degree of expectation from the meter display indicated by the suggestive display 111F001, which is displayed again, changes to a different level, so the suggestive display is temporarily erased. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing when the game is played, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[An example of re-executing the effect that was executed before erasing when the suggestive display is re-executed]
Next, the chance-up effect executed before the suggestive display 111F001 is once erased can be executed again when the suggestive display 111F001 is reapplied, and when the chance-up effect is executed, A description will be given of an effect control example capable of changing the stage of the meter display in the suggestive display 111F001.

Specifically, during the variable display, all the chance-up effects executed during the execution of the super reach SP effect are stored, and when the suggestive display 111F001 as shown in FIG. 8-4 (M) is displayed again, , the production control CPU 120 executes the stored chance-up production again to change the meter display of the suggestive display 111F001 and temporarily raise the level of the meter display to a higher level than before erasure. may be executed.

If such an effect is executed, the chance-up effect executed before the suggestive display 111F001 is erased once can be executed again when the suggestive display 111F001 is reapplied, and the predetermined effect is executed. Accordingly, by changing the stage of the display mode of the suggestive display 111F001, even when the chance-up effect is once executed and the big win game state is not controlled, the player's sense of regret is wiped out. can do.

In the case of executing such a production, the chance-up production is a normal chance-up production (weak chance-up production: first predetermined production), and the expectation of a big hit is higher than the normal chance-up production. strong chance-up effect: second predetermined effect) can be selected and executed, the normal chance-up effect executed as the chance-up effect executed before erasing the suggestive display 111F001 is replaced with the suggestive display 111F001. is performed again, the expectation of the player may be heightened by performing an effect that is upgraded to a strong chance-up effect and executed.

[Example of production in which the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the higher the rate of change in the level of expectation suggested by the re-displayed suggestive display to the highest level]
Next, in a pachinko game machine in which set values, such as winning odds, which are different in the degree of advantage for the player can be set by the setting means, the suggestive display 111F001 displayed again is displayed as the set value is more advantageous to the player. An example of an effect will be described in which the suggested degree of expectation (the degree of expectation controlled to the jackpot game state) is changed to the highest level at a higher rate.

For example, as a suggestive display effect type selection table as shown in FIG. A table may be provided in which the types of suggestive display effect are set so that the selection ratio of the meter display suggested by the re-displayed suggestive display 111F001 is different for each of the set values 1 to 6. In the table, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the higher the rate of selection of a high-level meter display as the meter display displayed by the suggestive display 111F001 displayed again. In this way, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the higher the probability that the degree of expectation suggested by the re-displayed suggestion display 111F001 will change to the highest stage. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the re-display of the suggestive display 111F001 and to excite the player's interest.

[Other control examples of meter display such as suggestion display 111F001]
Next, another control example of the meter display of the suggestive display 111F001 will be described. For example, a description will be given of control for executing a specific effect based on detection of a player's action (operation) by detection means such as the push button 31B and the push sensor 35B.

In the effect control CPU 120, in response to detection of continuous operation of the push button 31B (hereinafter referred to as repeated hits) as a continuous action by the player's own power, a meter effect is provided to change the display mode of the meter display shown in the image. In addition to this, based on the detection of a predetermined action of the player that is different from repeated hitting, such as a long-pressing operation of the push button 31B, determination of automatic repeated hitting that the push button 31B is considered to have been repeatedly hit at a predetermined interval. A meter effect is executed to change the display mode of the meter display.

In the meter effect, various effect controls are executed as described below. A meter effect is performed when a variation display is performed in a variation pattern of a special reach predetermined as a specific variation pattern (for example, a third super reach and a fourth super reach, which will be described later).

At the start of the special reach, "left", "middle", and "right" are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. is displayed by moving from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 to the corner portion of the display area. These decorative patterns form a ready-to-win pattern in which the "left" and "right" decorative patterns stop at the same pattern and the "middle" pattern is variably displayed.

A meter image corresponding to the suggestive display 111F001 is displayed on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 . The meter image has a plurality of scales (11 scales) in the vertical direction, and is an image displaying a so-called meter value. The scale of the meter image has a configuration in which one special scale "MAX scale" is provided on ten "normal scales". In the meter image, when the player's operation of the push button 120 is detected within the operation valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, the scale partly changes to the first color (blank portion in the figure). The meter value is displayed in the second color by changing from the color to the second color (hatched part of the pattern). The meter value changes (increases) from bottom to top as indicated by the dashed arrow in the figure.

A predetermined character image is displayed on the right side of the meter image (at the center of the display area of the image display device 5). Below the character image, a button image consisting of an image simulating the push button 31B and a character image of "Keep hitting!" is displayed. The display of the button image encourages the player to operate (repeatedly hit) the push button 31B.

Below the button image, an operation valid period image indicating the operation valid period of the push button 31B is displayed by a meter display in the form of a horizontal bar graph. In the operation valid period image, the operation valid period is indicated by a horizontal meter value that decreases in the direction of the dashed arrow in the drawing.

Regarding the special reach effect, if it is decided to shift to the first development effect, after the start of the special reach effect, the push button 31B is repeatedly hit by the player's operation within the operation valid period or auto. When the meter display of the meter image reaches the stage of level L5 by repeated hits, the transition is made to the first development effect.

Further, when it is determined that the special ready-to-win effect shifts to the second development effect, after the start of the special ready-to-win effect, the push button 31B is repeatedly hit by the player's action within the operation valid period. Alternatively, when the meter display of the meter image reaches the stage of level L10 by automatic repeated hitting, the transition to the second development effect is made.

In addition, when it is determined that the special ready-to-win effect will shift to a special advanced effect, after the start of the special ready-to-win effect, the push button 31B is repeatedly hit by the player's action within the operation valid period, or When the meter display of the meter image reaches the level MAX of the special stage by automatic repeated hitting, the special development performance is performed.

Next, the relationship between the detection determination and the change in the meter display of the meter image will be described for each of the self-powered repeated hits and the automatic repeated hits. First, the self-strike will be explained. Within the valid period of operation, every time a short press operation of the push button 31B is detected, it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 has repeatedly hit by itself. Each time self-strike is detected and determined, the display level of the meter value of the meter image (the number of display of the second color) is increased by one step.

When the special development effect is not selected when it is decided not to shift to the special development effect, if the self-strength repeated hits are detected and judged within the operation valid period, the meter value can reach the maximum level Ll0, but it is up to the level MAX. is controlled to limit the rise of the meter value so that it becomes unreachable.

When the special development effect is selected in which the transition to the special development effect has been made, the meter value can reach the maximum level Ll0 when the self-strike is detected and determined within the operation valid period, and after that, the self-strength streak occurs. is automatically controlled so that the meter value exceeds level L10 and reaches level MAX.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the self-strike is executed, the meter display of the meter image can reach the maximum level L10 according to the detection of the self-strike. Then, when it is decided not to shift to the special development performance, the change of the meter display due to the self-strike stops at the maximum level L10, and when it is decided to shift to the special development performance, the meter display is automatically changed. Control is executed to exceed level L10 and reach level MAX.

Next, auto repeated hits will be described. When a long press operation of the push button 31B for a specific period (for example, 1 second) or longer is detected within the valid operation period, as in , automatic repeated hitting determination is performed, which is regarded as having been executed repeatedly at predetermined time intervals.

When it is determined that the automatic repeated hits are automatic repeated hits, it is determined that repeated hits have been performed at predetermined time intervals. is displayed to increase step by step. The predetermined time interval at which it is determined that repeated hits have been executed by automatic repeated hits is longer than the time interval at which it is determined that automatic repeated hits have been executed. As a result, the rate of change in the display level of the meter value in response to automatic repeated tapping is controlled to be slower than the rate of change in the display level of the meter value in response to continuous tapping.

When the special development effect is not selected when it is decided not to shift to the special development effect, if the automatic repeated hits are detected and judged within the operation valid period, the meter value can reach the maximum level L5, but it can reach the maximum level MAX. is controlled to limit the rise of the meter value so that it becomes unreachable.

When the special development effect is selected in which the transition to the special development effect has been made, the meter value can reach the maximum level L5 if the automatic repeated hits are detected and determined within the operation valid period, and after that, the automatic repeated effects are performed. is automatically controlled so that the meter value exceeds level L5 and reaches level MAX.

As described above, in this embodiment, when automatic repeated hitting is executed, the meter display of the meter image can reach the maximum level L5 according to the detection of the automatic repeated hitting. Then, when it is decided not to shift to the special development performance, the change of the meter display due to automatic continuous hitting stops at the maximum level L5, and when it is decided to shift to the special development performance, the meter display automatically stops. Control is executed to exceed level L5 and reach level MAX.

In this way, comparing the time when the self-strike is executed and the time when the auto-strike is executed, the self-strike is detected and judged at a time interval shorter than the determination time interval of the automatic streak. Then, when the meter effect in which the meter value cannot reach the MAX level is executed, the maximum changeable meter value for self-strike is level L10, and the maximum changeable meter value for auto-roll is level L10. It is L5. When the meter effect that allows the meter value to reach the MAX level is executed, the maximum changeable meter value for self-strike is level L10, and the maximum changeable meter value for auto-roll is level L5. After that, at a predetermined timing, regardless of the operation, a display is made in which the meter value automatically reaches the level MAX from the current level for each of the self-powered repeated hits and the automatic repeated hits.

Such effect control can provide the following effects.
(1) A meter effect when a meter effect is executed as a specific effect based on the detection and determination of automatic repeated hits, and a meter effect is executed based on the detection and determination of automatic repeated hits. Compared with the level L5, which is the meter value at which the performance mode of the meter performance can be changed to the maximum, the specific level of the meter value at which the performance mode of the meter performance can be changed to the maximum is raised to a level L10, so that the meter performance can be hit repeatedly by itself. It is possible to make the player feel the meaning.

(2) When the effect mode of the meter effect reaches level L5, which is a predetermined stage, within the operation valid period, it becomes possible to shift to the first advanced effect, and the effect mode of the meter effect reaches level L10, which is a specific stage. In this case, it becomes possible to shift to the second development effect. As a result, the type of the effect mode to which the effect mode of the meter effect is developed is different between when the effect mode of the meter effect reaches a predetermined stage and when it reaches a specific stage, so that the player can continue by himself/herself. It can encourage action.

(3) When it is decided not to shift to the special development performance in the meter performance, the level MAX, which is the special stage of the meter performance, is the stage of the performance mode that cannot be reached when executing the self-strike. As a result, when it is decided not to shift to the special development presentation, the pachinko game machine 1 side is designed so that the player cannot reach the MAX level even if the player hits the game repeatedly at a high speed by himself/herself. It is possible to determine the stage of the production mode that can be reached by .

(4) It is determined that the automatic repeated hits are made based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, such as when the variable display is determined to be a big hit display result and the transition to a special development effect is determined. Then, the meter value is controlled to exceed the level L5 and reach the MAX within the operation valid period, so that the interest of the player who performs the automatic repeated hitting can be prevented from being lowered.

[Main Effects Obtained by Characteristic Portion 111F]
[1] As shown in FIG. 8-4, the effect of the suggestive display can be displayed again after the suggestive display 111F001 is once erased. Since it is possible to change the suggestive display 111F001 to a stage where the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than that, the timing of the change of the suggestive display 111F001 is unexpected, and the interest in the game can be heightened. can.

[2] As shown in FIG. 8-4(J), the suggestive display 111F001 is erased heresy after a predetermined notification is given to the effect that it is not controlled to the jackpot game state due to the temporary stop due to the display result of the decorative symbol being removed. Later, it is possible to display again as shown in FIG. 8-4 (M). As a result, the player's expectation for the big-hit game state can be maintained even after the predetermined notification that the control to the big-hit game state is not performed is given.

[3] Suggestion display 111F001, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (J), after the predetermined notification that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the display result is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state, after that, as shown in FIG. 8-4. Like (K) to (M), it is possible to display again in relation to the execution of a special effect such as a roulette effect. As a result, the suggestive display 111F001 can be displayed again in relation to the execution of the special performance after the predetermined notification to the effect that the control to the jackpot game state is not performed, so that the suggestive display can be performed when the special performance is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the re-display of 111F001.

[4] As shown in [Example of effect of re-executing the effect once executed before erasing when the suggestive display is re-executed], the chance-up effect executed before the suggestive display 111F001 is once erased is replaced with the suggestive display 111F001. is executed again, and the stage of the display mode of the suggestion display 111F001 can be changed according to the execution of the predetermined effect, so that the chance-up effect is executed once. A player's feeling of regret can be wiped away even when the game is not controlled to a big win game state.

[5] Suggestive display such as when non-reach out of reach display, normal reach out of reach display, super reach out of display, etc. shown in the first to third timings of (A) to (C) in FIG. 8-6 111F001 can be erased once at a plurality of timings. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), for example, if the suggestion display 111F001 is once erased at the first SP reach out display stage and the second SP reach out display stage, the suggestion at the normal reach out display stage When the suggestive display 111F001 is re-displayed, the ratio of the step between the suggestive display of 80% and the suggestive display of 100% is different compared to when the display 111F001 is once erased. As a result, depending on the timing at which the suggestive display 111F001 is once erased, the degree of expectation from the meter display indicated by the suggestive display 111F001, which is displayed again, changes to a different level, so the suggestive display is temporarily erased. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing when the game is played, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[6] [Example of production in which the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the higher the probability that the level of expectation suggested by the re-displayed suggestive display changes to the highest stage] Since it is possible to execute an effect in which the degree of expectation suggested by the re-displayed suggestive display 111F001 changes to the highest stage at a higher rate, the more advantageous it is to the re-display of the suggestive display 111F001. It is possible to draw the player's attention and excite the interest.

[Other Modifications of Characteristic Portion 111F]
[1] The execution timing of the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 8-4 may be set to a fixed timing regardless of the type of variation pattern of the variable display. Also, the execution timing of the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 8-4 may be set to different timing depending on the type of variation pattern of the variable display.

[2] The execution timing of the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 8-4 can be selected from among multiple types of execution timing types so that even if the type of variation pattern of the variable display is the same, the timing can be different. good too.

[3] Fig. 8-4 shows an example of an image of a combination of letters and numbers suggesting an increased chance as an example of a chance-up effect. Other effects such as color, cut-in image color, movable body color, or background image color may be used.

[4] If the suggestive display 111F001 shown in FIG. , can be anything.

[5] The chance-up effect shown in FIG. 8-4 can be said to be a kind of advance notice effect such as a big-hit advance notice effect, so it may be called "chance-up notice".

[6] When the indication display 111F001 shown in FIG. 8-4 is once erased and the display effect is executed again, the meter display is once changed to a higher level than before erasing, and once higher than before erasing. There are productions that do not change in stages, and it is possible to select which production to execute by lottery. For example, when a big win is achieved, the rate of execution of an effect that once changes to a higher level than before erasing may be higher than when a loss occurs.

[7] The meter display when the suggestive display 111F001 shown in FIG. 8-4 is temporarily erased and then redisplayed may be rendered as "100%".

[8] The effect of displaying again after erasing the suggestive display 111F001 shown in FIG. 8-4 may be performed for the active display. For example, after the active display is once erased, the active display to be displayed again may be displayed in a display mode (color or the like) that gives a higher expectation of a big hit than before the erasure.

[9] The effect of temporarily erasing and then redisplaying the suggestive display 111F001 shown in FIG. 8-4 may be executed for the pending display. For example, after the pending display is temporarily erased, the pending display to be displayed again may be displayed in a display mode (color or the like) that gives a higher expectation of a big hit than before the temporary deletion.

[10] The effect of the suggestive display 111F001 whose display mode can be changed in stages shown in FIG. 8-4 may be applied to a so-called step-up effect in which the effect mode (display mode) changes in stages.

[11] In the suggestion display 111F001 shown in FIG. 8-4, the meter display can be displayed on a plurality of display units, but it may be possible to display it on a single display unit. In addition, although the meter display of the suggestive display 111F001 is assumed to change in steps of 20%, the present invention is not limited to this, such as stepwise changes in steps of 5%, stepwise changes in steps of 30%, etc. may be changed in other stepwise manners.

[12] Advantageous states that are advantageous to the player include, in addition to the above-described jackpot game state, other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variable state), a time saving state, and a high base state. Further, the advantageous state advantageous to the player may include a state such as a so-called small win rush state in which small wins can occur frequently and balls can be obtained by small wins.

[13] As an example of the setting values in the above-described embodiment, there are six types of setting steps from setting value 1 to setting value 6. As shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, there are setting steps of setting values greater than the six types of setting values 1 to 6, such as three setting steps of setting values 1 to 3. good too.
(Explanation relating to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) that differ in the degree of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be set to one of the set values of the above-mentioned advantageous state by changing the gradual display mode (gradual display mode such as numerical display and level display) suggestive display means for displaying a suggestive display (suggestive display 111F001, etc. in FIG. 8-4, etc.) that can suggest the degree of expectation controlled by 4 (J), etc.), it can be displayed again (Fig. 8-4 (M), etc.). It is possible to display the suggestive display (such as 100% as shown in FIG. 100% such as 8-4 (M)), and after a predetermined notification that the control to the advantageous state is not performed (such as notification of a deviation display result such as FIG. 8-4 (J etc.)), the suggestion Suggestion suggesting that the display can be displayed again (FIG. 8-4 (M), etc.) after the display is once erased (FIG. 8-4 (J), etc.), and furthermore, it is controlled to the advantageous state Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing effects (for example, chance-up effect) (for example, a portion that executes variable display effect processing after effect control CPU 120 executes chance-up effect determination processing shown in FIG. 10-2) In addition, the suggestive effect execution means can execute a special suggestive effect that notifies that the control to the advantageous state is performed as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the chance-up effect in patterns CU-3 or part executed in pattern CU-4), and as the special suggestive effects, it is possible to execute a first special suggestive effect and a second special suggestive effect in which the effect mode is different from the first special suggestive effect (for example, effect control A part where the chance-up effect can be executed by the CPU 120 for the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4), and the ratio of executing the first special suggestion effect when being controlled to the advantageous state is set. The ratio is the same regardless of the value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the determination ratio of pattern CU-3 is 10% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1) ), the rate at which the second special suggestion effect is executed when controlled to the advantageous state differs according to the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(A), the pattern CU The determination ratio of -4 varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) game machine.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to re-display the suggestive display after once erasing it, and when the suggestive display is re-displayed, there is a high degree of expectation that the suggestive display will be controlled in an advantageous state compared to before it was once erased. Since it is possible to display suggestive displays that change in stages, the timing at which the suggestive displays change is unexpected, and when the suggestive displays are displayed again, it is expected that the suggestive displays will be controlled in a more advantageous state than before they were once erased. By displaying the suggestive display that has changed to a higher level, the interest in the game can be heightened. In addition, even after the predetermined notification that the control to the advantageous state is not made is given, the player's sense of expectation for the advantageous state can be maintained. In addition, since the player can be made to pay attention to which of the first special suggestive effect and the second special suggestive effect is executed as the special suggestive effect, the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the suggestive effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state may be executed when displaying a suggestive display capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of being controlled to be in an advantageous state by a gradual change in the display mode. . For example, the suggestive display means that can be displayed again (see FIG. 8-4 (M), etc.) after once erasing the suggestive display (FIG. 8-4 (J), etc.) When displaying a suggestive display (such as 100% as in FIG. 8-4 (M)) that has changed to a stage in which the degree of expectation is controlled to be more advantageous than (80% as in (I)) is advantageous When it is controlled to the state (the big hit is confirmed), as a special suggestive effect (big hit confirmed effect) that informs that it is controlled to the advantageous state, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (E) and (F) Character display such as "big hit!" On the other hand, the ratio of displaying "Congratulations!" in the special suggestive effect (big hit confirmed effect) differs depending on the set value (for example, the setting value that is advantageous to the player is displayed) a high percentage of cases). By doing so, at the timing when the suggestive display that has changed to a stage where the degree of expectation of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is higher than before being erased is displayed, a special suggestive effect that informs that it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state is executed. Since it is possible to infer the possibility that set values advantageous to the player are set depending on the type of the special suggestive effect to be executed, the game interest when the suggestive display is once erased and then redisplayed can be inferred. It can be improved further.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of enhancing interest in a game and improving the interest in the game, it is possible to control the game machine to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (eg, 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage, and is controlled to the advantageous state Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, chance-up effect) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-2, and then executes the effect process during variable display. part), and the suggestive effect execution means can execute a special suggestive effect that notifies that the control to the advantageous state is performed as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the chance-up effect as the pattern CU -3 or the part executed in pattern CU-4), as the special suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a first special suggestive effect and a second special suggestive effect in which the effect mode is different from the first special suggestive effect (for example, , the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the chance-up effect in patterns CU-3 and CU-4), and the rate at which the first special suggestion effect is executed when the advantageous state is controlled is set. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(A), the determination ratio of pattern CU-3 is 10% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1). part), the rate at which the second special suggestion effect is executed when being controlled to the advantageous state differs according to the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) , the determination ratio of the pattern CU-4 differs according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) game machine. Examples of the form examples of these gaming machines will be described below as other form examples.

Characteristic portions of other embodiments will be described below.
(Description of characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 103SG of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of each step of the flow chart in the present embodiment, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed description by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .
(Example 1)

Next, the game machine according to Example 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-19.

First, FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-3, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 103SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 103SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 9-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, the main board 11 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 103SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. The main board 11 also includes a lock switch 103SG051 for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also

A setting-switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052, is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 103SG201.

Since the substrate case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 103SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch that can execute switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, with a setting key. In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be shared by one key.

A display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 103SG201. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and placed on top of the board case 103SG201. In other words, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 103SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 103SG025A, a second pending display device 103SG025B capable of displaying the second pending memory number, a normal symbol display device 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbols, a normal pattern pending display device 103SG025C capable of displaying a normal pattern pending memory number, A round display 103SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display unit 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 103SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 103SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A uses two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 103SG025A and the second suspension display 103SG025B each have 4-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 103SG025A and second pending display 103SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of pending memories increases, the second from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, every time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment). In the section 103SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 103SG025A is lit, and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 103SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 103SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321, and the second movable body 103SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. An origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 9-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 103SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the large winning opening to notify that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number, in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation. Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the characteristic portion 103SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for judging the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 9-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 9-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach are set so that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the degree of expectation for the big hit increases in order, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-6, a form is exemplified in which the content of variation (content of presentation) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special design) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special design) shown in Fig. 9-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 9-7(A) and 9-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characterizing section 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and may vary the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a "small hit" depending on the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range A number within the range plus the non-common number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is defined as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 9-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figure 9-8 (A) and Figure 9-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) stored in ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 9-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 9-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9. In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and the jackpot game. A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the state shifts to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Furthermore, the jackpot game state by "jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the big win game state ends. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (No decision value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the jackpot type is determined as the jackpot B. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B. .

As described above, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs depending on the set value, the game interest can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

Further, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the jackpot probability, the easier it is for the jackpot C to be determined as the jackpot type). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the setting values, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area A switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) and 9-10 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table used when the jackpot type is jackpot A (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), the variation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), the variation pattern of super reach β big hit A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), if the set value is "1", 1 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to 400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 is super reach It is assigned to the β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "2", 1 to 380 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "3", 1 to 360 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 361 to 820 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "4", 1 to 340 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 341 to 805 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "5", 1 to 320 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 321 to 790 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 775 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), if the set value is "1", , 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of super reach β jackpot. Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 180 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 181 to 510 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 160 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "4", 1 to 140 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 141 to 430 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "5", 1 to 120 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 390 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 100 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) is the ratio of determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of big win is "big win B" or "big win C", and the type of big win is "big win A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player thinks that "big win B" or "big win C" will be achieved. can raise the expectations of

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997 Among them, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In this embodiment, only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, Variation patterns for small hits with set values 1 to 6 may be determined at different rates from a plurality of variation patterns.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation within the range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), if the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 481 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 460 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 401 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for the number of total pending storage in the low base of 5 or more), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (D), in the deviation variation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set to decrease in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α deviation fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviations, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is out, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the variable display by not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are completely the same between each set value as the variation pattern for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. , The present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern between non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are exemplified in a form that is the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, super reach α Regardless of the setting value in which only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β is set, may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the set value is the same. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, a mode is exemplified in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach differs according to the set value. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 9-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, in each loss variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the super reach loss variation The random number ranges assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variable display to be actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (the probability of losing the super reach) Appearance rate of variation pattern) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the ratio of the variable display to be executed in the variation pattern of super reach out in accordance with the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but considering the jackpot probability and the probability of losing for each set value, the variable display is super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. may be executed with a variation pattern of

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characterizing portion 103SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9-12(A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display section 103SG029A, a second display section 103SG029B, a third display section 103SG029C, and a fourth display section 103SG029D. Each of the first display portion 103SG029A to the fifth display portion 103SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 103SG029A to fifth display section 103SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 103SG029, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (B) and 9-12 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability/low-probability base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low-probability base state) for every 3rd out (low-probability/low-probability base state) in all game states. Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentage on display monitor 103SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A, and "1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display "b3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying these base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 is executed under the control of the main substrate 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. In addition, the display color of each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 differs according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. When it is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. 9-13 is a flow chart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (103SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010). move on.

At 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 103SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (103SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (103SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (103SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the set value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is designated as an identifiable set value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (103SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 103SG029 is terminated.

If the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF at 103SGSa011 (103SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the processes of 103SGSa013a to 103SGSa013c.

At 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 103SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 103SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) without executing, go to 103SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes the process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, as indicated by 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017 to 103SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), proceed to 103SGSa022; (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

In addition, at 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, ie, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened, the lock switch 103SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (103SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the processes 103SGSa009 to 103SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (103SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (103SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (103SGSa026; N), the processing of 103SGSa025 and 103SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 103SG029 stops blinking (103SGSa027) and proceeds to 103SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1, only a part of all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 103SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (103SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (103SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error) and the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (103SGSa034; N), the processing of 103SGSa033 and 103SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 103SG029A, second display unit 103SG029B, third display unit 103SG029C, and fourth display unit 103SG029D that constitute the display monitor 103SG029 as notification (error notification) of the recovery from the power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. is displayed (103SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 103SGSa032 to 103SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 103SG029. , the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are notified of the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

In addition, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON at 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined at 103SGSa014 that the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014 ;Y).

9-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 103SG194A Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set at 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), start Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning, 1 buffer number It shifts up by minutes (103SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets 3 symbols as even numbers as the stop symbols. A combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, a combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) in which the three patterns are "7" as the stop pattern. decide. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect determining process shown in FIG. 9-15, and determines whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Effect during variable display)
The effect during the variable display includes, as a result of effect, an advantageous state suggestion result that suggests control to the jackpot game state, a setting suggestion result that suggests the setting of the set value performed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process, It is an effect (predetermined effect) that can be either. In this characteristic part 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a ready-to-win notice (announcement effect) that suggests the possibility of a big hit with the variable display mode becoming a reach as an effect in which the result of the effect is the result of suggesting an advantageous state. be. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the setting values 1 to 6 the setting value is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in which both the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion can be executed when the effect result can be either the advantageous state suggesting result or the setting suggesting result. When it is possible, it is possible to execute the ready-to-reach notice in which the performance result is the advantageous state suggestion result, prior to the setting suggestion in which the performance result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 9-16, the effect during variable display has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9. When the execution is determined, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the basis of which the variable display effect is to be executed, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the effect mode. It is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 9-18 (A) to (C), the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variable display of the pattern (timing before the variable display mode becomes ready-to-win). Then, a plurality of (e.g., eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area, The effect during variable display ends by fading out to the right side of the display area. In addition, while a plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side, an image Z2 may be displayed showing that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body breaks and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies break and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies will break and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies will break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies will break and fall. , In the case of the pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and dropped.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 (B) and 9-19 (A), patterns PT-1 to PT-8 all have the same timing at which the paraglider is destroyed, and each pattern PT-1 to A number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 are destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number of them may be fine). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-19(B), pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like pattern PT-8, but the mode in which the paragliders are destroyed is pattern PT- 8 is different. Specifically, 7 paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining 1 body is destroyed at the 2nd timing after the 1st timing when the other 7 bodies are destroyed. .

The production period of such a variable display production is executed based on which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, that is, the ready-to-reach notice in which the production result is an advantageous state suggestion result or the production result is a set suggestion result Regardless of which of the setting suggestions is to become and a non-common mode effect that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result (for example, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed on the image display device 5, and a non-common effect period during which the effect of moving downward in the display area of No. 5) is executed.

In addition, in the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as an effect during the variable display, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, but the decorative patterns are displayed in a smaller size than usual. Small symbols may be variably displayed at predetermined locations. In addition, during the execution period of the effect during variable display, another notice effect or the like different from the effect during variable display may be executed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 9-16, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. For patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are specific patterns (specific modes) corresponding to the setting suggestion that suggests which one of ~ 6, and the number of paragliders destroyed is 8, It is a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to a reach notice that suggests the possibility of reach. In other words, during the variable display effect, the effect mode in the common effect period is the same, but the suggested target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (the number of paragliders to be destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and 1 to 7 paragliders are displayed. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest the possibility that the set values are odd numbers (eg, 1, 3, 5), and patterns PT-2 and PT-4 suggest that the set values are even numbers. (eg, 2, 4, 6). 6 suggests that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (e.g., 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (e.g., 6). .

Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any set value of 5 or 6 (high setting) is determined. The first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with a low expectation of being The second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high);

In this characteristic portion 103SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set low and the setting values 5 and 6 are high, but the setting values 1 to 3 may be low and the setting values 4 to 6 may be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

On the other hand, pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the pattern may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and pattern PT-9 suggests the possibility that the variable display of the pattern will be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding pattern PT-8, the first special pattern with low expectation of super reach by being determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the pattern is normal reach {reach notice (low), first specific aspect}, and for pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach advance notice (high), second special mode}.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 is a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests control to the jackpot game state and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-9) that suggests settings. 1 to PT-7), a variable display effect can be executed based on one of a plurality of types of effect modes including pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (predetermined effect of special mode) When setting suggestions (predetermined effects of specific aspects) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can all be executed, ready-to-win announcements can be executed with priority over setting suggestions.

In the first embodiment, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 are determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Since the variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a loss than when the result is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 is a super reach, that is, the degree of expectation for a big hit is the pattern. While it is a lower pattern than PT-9, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is a loss, so the pattern PT-9 is , Super Reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation for a big hit than the pattern PT-8.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, in the effect during the variable display, the number of paragliders destroyed indicates the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set. It is not limited to this, and a big hit or high setting may be suggested by the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, 8) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and to suggest which set value is set, the production mode can be changed in various ways, for example, the number of appearances of characters, the type of characters that appear, etc. It may also be possible to suggest a big hit or a set value by means of.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the numbers corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or illuminating the game effect lamp 9 or the like when falling, it may be possible to notify that a big hit or a pattern with a high degree of expectation is set.

As shown in FIG. 9-15, in the process of determining effect during variable display, effect control CPU 120 first identifies the result of variable display and the variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (loss, non-probability variable big win A, probability variable big win B, probability variable big win C, small win) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the . In addition, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area.

Then, along with extracting the random number for determining the reach notice type, using the production (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. A lottery is held to determine the type of reach advance notice in the case of 103SGS292.

9-17 (A) in the production (reach notice) type determination table A, when the variation pattern is super reach, 20 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and 20 are assigned to pattern PT-8. , and 60 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-9. In other words, when the variation pattern is super reach, PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than super reach.

When the variation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. there is In other words, when the variation pattern is normal reach, PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than normal reach.

Also, if the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to patterns PT-8 and PT-9. In other words, if the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, if the variation pattern is normal reach, the pattern PT-8 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is normal reach, and if the variation pattern is super reach, Pattern PT-9 is more likely to be won at a higher rate than in cases other than super reach fluctuation patterns.

Therefore, when the production based on the pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach fluctuation pattern than the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the production based on the pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than the normal reach fluctuation pattern. It is highly likely that it is a reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, the pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and the pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that it will be, it is a pattern of reach notice (high) with high expectations for big hits.

Returning to FIG. 9-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of lottery for the presence or absence of the reach notice execution and the type in 103SGS292. (103SGS293). If it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 is determined with priority over the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294), Go to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that pattern PT-9 is not won in 103SGS292, that is, if reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 is won, reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) } is won, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read out to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (103SGS295). Next, while extracting the setting suggestion type determination random number, using the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the setting value specified in 103SGS295, whether or not setting suggestion is executed in the effect during variable display, A lottery is conducted to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 9-17(B), when the setting value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1. , 10 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 25 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-4, and pattern Four decision values are assigned to PT-5, one decision value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one decision value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 25 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. Determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number of 1 or 3, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. If the set value is an even number 2 or 4, patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are likely to be won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and if the set value is 5 , pattern PT-5 is likely to be won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, pattern PT-6 is more likely to be won than when the set value is other than 6. It's getting easier. In addition, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, the set value of 6 is confirmed when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 where the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider will be destroyed. If an effect based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in which the number of characters displayed is 5 or more is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the set value is either 5 or 6. In other words, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are set as high setting (setting value 5 or 6) with a low possibility of setting suggestion (low), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are high setting (setting value 5 or 6). 6) is set as a setting suggestion (high) with a high possibility.

In the first embodiment, the random number for determining the reach announcement type and the random number for determining the setting suggestion type are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of determination values of each determination random number is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number may be determined as appropriate. Just do it. In addition, determination random number counters for generating these determination random numbers are set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in the random number update process.

Returning to FIG. 9-15, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery for the presence or absence of the setting suggestion and the type at 103SGS296. A decision is made as to whether or not the prize has been won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been elected, if the non-execution of the reach announcement is elected in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on is uniquely determined, and when the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298), and proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won , Based on the non-execution of the setting suggestion or the winning of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at 103SGS297, it is determined whether the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is winning at 103SGS293 (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was won in 103SGS300, when non-execution of setting suggestion is won in 103SGS297, execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is uniquely determined, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is elected in 103SGS297, reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 Execution is determined (103SGS301) over setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 through PT-4 and proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is not won in 103SGS300, it is determined whether any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won. If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is selected (103SGS302), execution of the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Also, if none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 have been won, that is, if the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without determining the execution of the variable display effect. Terminate the effect determination process.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any one of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 9-14, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution determination flag is set at 103SGS278, that is, whether or not the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277 is performed. In the process, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display of any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined.

When the variable display effect execution determination flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, sets the period until the start of the variable display effect start waiting timer for variable display effect start (103SGS279), and executes the variable display effect effect. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and go to 103SGS281. On the other hand, when the effect execution determination flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the effect during variable display, in this characteristic part 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is the start timing of the effect during variable display. Since the effect during variable display is specified based on and is set to start the effect during variable display, the period until the start timing of effect during variable display is set to the timer for waiting to start the effect during variable display. The present invention is not limited to this. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the effect during variable display is started may be set in the variable display effect start waiting timer.

At 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the production control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decoration pattern according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (103SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (103SGS286).

Thus, in the present embodiment 1, the effect control CPU 120, when executing the variable display of the symbols based on the reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display, before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode At performance timing, it is possible to execute either a reach notice or a setting suggestion as a performance during variable display, and when determining whether or not to execute the performance during variable display, the reach notice becomes an advantageous state suggestion result as a performance result. It is possible to execute the (special mode effect) with priority over the setting suggestion (specific mode effect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display in FIG. take precedence over

That is, the effect control CPU120, in the lottery of the reach notice, if the variation pattern is super reach, to determine the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294), reach Notice (high) will be executed (prioritized) at a higher rate than setting suggestions. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is 60%. , even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296 based on the reach notice (low) winning, setting suggestion based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at 103SGS297 (high ) is not won, 103SGS301 will determine the execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, so the reach notice will be executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion (priority). Become.

In addition, the reach notice includes reach notice (low) and reach notice (high) that suggests that the ratio of control to a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 has a pattern PT -9 and the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executable, the reach prediction (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is set to the pattern PT- 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest caused by the effect during the variable display due to excessive priority given to the advance notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

In addition, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) that suggests that there is a higher possibility that the setting is higher than the setting suggestion (low). -When both setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 can be executed, the pattern PT-8 Predictive reach (low) based on 103SGS301 can be executed in preference to setting suggestions (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the effect during the variable display due to excessive priority given to the setting suggestion and the restriction on the execution of the ready-to-win announcement.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For more information, Reach Warning High precedes Setting Suggestion High, Setting Reach Warning High precedes Reach Warning Low, and Reach Warning Low precedes Setting Suggestion ( low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "prediction of reach (high)>suggestion of setting (high)>prediction of reach (low)>suggestion of setting (low)".

In this characteristic part 103SG, it is sufficient that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the effect during variable display is a effect executed during the variable display period of the pattern, and the ready-to-reach notice suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least It suggests which set value is not changed during the operating period. In addition, it is not preferable for the game arcade that setting suggestions are frequently made and the player can easily guess what the set value is. Therefore, in the super reach fluctuation pattern and when the variable display effect is executed when the set value is high, it is preferable for the player to suggest either, but the set value may be suggested at another timing. However, since the suggestion of a big win can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the ready-to-win notice appears at a higher rate than the set suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display production is a production that is executed only during the variable display period of the pattern based on the super reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which has a higher expectation for big hits than the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display mode is a reach. In this case, the player's expectation for the big win is higher than in the case where the reach is not achieved. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, particularly in the case of the jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease, and the production will become inappropriate. It is possible to prevent the presentation from becoming inappropriate by executing the notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, as a tendency of the effect during variable display, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and a high In some circumstances, such as setting, the execution ratio may be set such that the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach announcement.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is preferentially executed (before) the lottery for the setting suggestion. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution ratio of the ready-to-win announcement becomes higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, the setting suggestion lottery may be performed prior to the ready-to-reach announcement lottery. , the order is arbitrary. In addition, if the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach notice is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, It is not limited to what is described.

Incidentally, in the first embodiment, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a mode is exemplified in which the setting suggestion suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be executed, but the present invention is described. is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion may indicate whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has changed since the pachinko game machine 1 was started last time.

(First invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When it is possible to execute either setting suggesting effect, no consideration is given as to which effect is given priority, and when the control is in an advantageous state, the setting suggesting effect that makes the set value is executed, etc. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance becomes inappropriate. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the first invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means, when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed (for example, the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display of the symbol was started (variable display mode is a timing before becoming a reach)), the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can be executed as shown in FIG. 9- 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the ready-to-win announcement lottery, the execution of the ready-to-win announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined with priority over the setting suggestions in 103SGS294. Even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, 103SGS301 Reach notice (low ) is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4./Production control CPU 120, reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > Reach notice (low) > Setting suggestion (low) The part that determines the execution of the production based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 (see Figure 9-20 of Modification 1))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance from being inappropriate due to the execution of the predetermined performance in the specific mode when the control is performed in the advantageous state.

In detail, even if the variable display result is a big hit, setting suggestions that can be suggested even at timings other than the variable display are prioritized over the reach notice. , the player's expectation for the big win cannot be suitably increased, and the performance can be prevented from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., reach notice (low)) and a second special mode (e.g., reach notice (high)) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second special mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, , When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. high) is determined prior to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special mode. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-15 of the first embodiment, Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to excessive restriction on the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific mode includes a first specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (high )) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second specific mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, , If any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. -Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific mode. (For example, if the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement in the effect determination process during variable display shown in FIG. 9-15 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode being excessively restricted.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Action prompt notification means capable of executing action prompt notification prompting the player to perform an action (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation prompt effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. executable part.) and
Action detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific action (for example, action of operating push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the action promotion notification by the action promotion notification means is being executed. and,
with
The predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific action by the action detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can press the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific action to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can execute an effect to change to the image Z2 (destroy the paraglider and make it fall).Modified example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a player who knows the specific action can execute the predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined effect is a common effect period during which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed (for example, either a reach notice or a setting suggestion) A common effect period during which an effect is executed in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area regardless of whether the A non-common effect period that can specify whether it is the effect or the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, it is possible to specify whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion, that is, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of the image display device 5 is executed (see FIGS. 9-18)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by having the common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player as to whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode will be executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing a predetermined effect of a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state and also suggests a setting (for example, it is possible to execute both a reach notice and a setting suggestion). Sometimes, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, an image of a moving paraglider with a character appearing, etc.) is displayed. parts, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player for execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the ready-to-reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) are executable means, for example, the suggestion about the display result of one variable display. Any timing may be used as long as it is the timing at which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the pending memory If the display result is suggested, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the period of a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory is executed and the execution period of the variable display. . In addition, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

In addition, when both reach notice (predetermined effect of special mode) and setting suggestion (predetermined effect of specific mode) can be executed, reach notice can be executed with priority over setting suggestion. The lottery is executed with priority over the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is preceded by the execution of the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 and executing reach announcements based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It should be noted that executing the reach notice at a rate higher than the setting suggestion includes executing the reach notice at a rate of 100% and not executing the setting suggestion, that is, the reach notice execution ratio is 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of destroyed paragliders suggests the possibility of a big hit or a set value, that is, the variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executable. As an example, the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executed when they can be executed. Both the advantageous state suggesting result and the setting suggesting result may be included as the effect during variable display.

That is, in the first embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common common effect period between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the reach notice and the setting suggestion have different production modes (the common effect period It does not have a corresponding period) may be a separate production (specifically, the reach announcement is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-20. 9-20, (A) is a flowchart showing the process of determining effects during variable display as Modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing execution ratios of reach notice and setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to execute the reach notice and the type is given priority over the lottery for whether or not to execute the setting suggestion and the type, so that the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and lottery for ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-20(A), in the process of determining effect during variable display, effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, a random number for determining the effect type is extracted, and whether or not the effect during variable display (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting) is executed using a table C (not shown) for determining the type of effect (notice of reach/suggestion of setting), A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach advance notice or setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS312).

Although not shown, the effect (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting) type determination table C (not shown) sets the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 according to the type of variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, the determination ratio of the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 varies depending on the type of variation pattern and the setting values 1 to 6, but the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion shown in FIG. 9-20 (B) As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (prioritized) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. (eg, 50% reach notice, 40% setting suggestion, and 10% non-execution are determined).

Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, reach notice (high) is higher than reach notice (low) (for example, reach notice (high) 40%, reach notice (low) 10%) is preferably determined by Also, if the setting values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) to setting suggestion (low) is higher than setting suggestion (high) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35%, setting suggestion (low) is 5 %). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 is the ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low) of the effect based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 Decide to execute.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion is exemplified based on the variation pattern and setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, Depending on the variation pattern, the set value, and the result of the variable display, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different. In detail, regardless of whether the variation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach variation pattern, when a big hit occurs, the reach notice is given priority over the setting suggestion at a higher rate than when the loss occurs. is preferred.

Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either the ready-to-reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, the effect result of the effect during variable display is It is also possible to make it possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As the specific effect, for example, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, the character (e.g., displaying an image in which a paraglider appears), or displaying an image in which the display mode of the paraglider (e.g., color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode. may be displayed, the background color may be changed, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special effect sound may be output in accordance with the image display of the paraglider, or a light emitting body may emit light in a special light emission mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the effect during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be made variable. Each of them may be independently executable at a performance timing different from the presentation during display.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice in a manner different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. On the other hand, setting suggestions in a manner different from the setting suggestions shown in FIGS. It may be executable.
(Example 2)

In Example 1 of the characterizing part 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display of , the effect during variable display may be executed a plurality of times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 9-21(A) as the second embodiment, a first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is targeted for the variation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach. Effect during variable display can be executed in a second period after the first period.

Since the variable display time for non-reach and small hit variation patterns is too short to execute the effect during variable display twice or more, in the second embodiment, the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach are the targets for execution of the effect during variable display. However, non-reach and small hit variation patterns may be included as targets for execution of effects during variable display.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the variable display effect determination process described above, whether or not to execute the variable display effect is determined according to the variation pattern using the variable display effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 9-21(B). determined by different percentages. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-21(B), when the variation pattern is normal reach, 40 out of 100 variable display effect execution determination random numbers are stored in the variable display effect execution determination table. are assigned to the execution of the effect during variable display, and 60 are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display. Further, when the variation pattern is super reach, 60 of the 100 variable-display effect execution determination random numbers are assigned to the execution of the variable-display effect execution in the variable-display effect execution determination table. are assigned to non-execution of effects during variable display.

Incidentally, in the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the effect during variable display is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 9-21(A).

When the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIGS. Execution of the setting suggestion and the ready-to-reach notice is determined at different ratios between the effect during the variable display and the effect during the variable display executed during the second period. In the same period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution ratio of setting suggestion and ready-to-win notice is set to be the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the variation pattern is normal reach, the effect type during variable display (effect PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value set in pachinko machine 1. , pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation (high)) at a rate of 40%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-24, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) was determined, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation) at a rate of 60% (high)).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-24, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- at a rate of 1% 5 to PT-7 {Suggestion setting (high)}, 35% decided pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.2% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, 2.2% determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 55% determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 2% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 5% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-25 and 9-26, when the variation pattern is super reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 decided to {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 15%, pattern PT-9 {reach notice at a rate of 25% (high)}. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the set value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, at a rate of 1.2% decided to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, 2.2% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 decided to {setting suggestion (low)}, at a rate of 1.5% decided to one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 2% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, 15% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 5% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 15% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach The rate (60%) at which the execution of notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach It is set higher than the percentage (40%) at which execution of advance notice (low) or reach advance notice (high)} is determined.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the ready-to-reach notice, which is a result of suggesting an advantageous state. It is possible to heighten expectations for a big hit.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) Or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined In the second period, regarding the effect type of the variable display effect executed during the second period, the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined. Any one of PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion to set (low) or suggestion to set (high)} is set higher than the determined rate.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 corresponding to the reach announcement are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are determined in the second period. By being determined at a lower rate than the first period in the period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion in the second period. .

For this reason, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the effect during the variable display in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the effect during the variable display in the second period, that is, during the variable display As the performance is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice is lowered (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed at the first time, so that the variable display Since the player can predict that there is a high possibility that the variable display will be super reachable before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectation for the variable display being super reachable is reduced. It is designed so that it can be suppressed.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, the effect during variable display executed in the second period is more favorable than the effect during variable display executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any one of pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the effect during variable display is executed, the effect during variable display is more likely to be executed in pattern PT-9, so the game for the effect during variable display being executed in pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-8. It can sustain people's expectations.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the effect during variable display is executed twice in the first period and the second period. However, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more. In the case where the effect during variable display is executed three or more times in this way, by setting the determination ratio of the effect type so that the pattern PT-9 is likely to be determined each time the effect during variable display is executed, It may be possible to maintain the technician's sense of expectation for a longer period of time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period have pattern PT- as the effect type. 1 to PT-7 {Suggestion of setting (low) or suggestion of setting (high)} are determined at different rates, so the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during the second period are executed. It is difficult for setting suggestions to be executed continuously during the variable display effect. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to monotony of the effect during variable display due to execution of setting suggestions in both of these two effects during variable display.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period have pattern PT- as the effect type. 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} are determined differently, so the variable display effect executed in the first period and the second period are executed It is difficult to continuously execute the reach notice with the effect during variable display. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to monotony of the effect during the variable display due to execution of the ready-to-win announcement in both of these two effects during the variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period. In the case of executing, the form in which the rate of execution of reach notice is different as the effect during variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is controlled in the first period In the case of executing the effect during variable display and the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period, the rate at which the ready-to-win announcement is executed as the effect during variable display may be the same. By doing so, when the effect during the variable display is executed in the first period and the second period, the ready-to-reach notice is executed as the effect during the variable display in the first period and the second period. , the player can be expected in the same way.

In addition, in the present embodiment 2, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the advance notice effect during the variable display is executed in the same period Although the rate at which the reach notice is determined to be executed is the same as the effect during variable display, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the notice effect during variable display executed during the same period , the rate at which execution of the ready-to-win notice is determined as the effect during variable display may differ according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁By doing so, according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed as the effect during the variable display changes in the first period and the second period, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the middle production from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment 2, as shown in FIGS. 9-22 to 9-26, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the first period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (pattern PT-1 to Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate of determining the execution of any pattern PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same rate, and the rate of determining the reach notice (pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9 execution ratio) is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine. Similarly, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the second period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio of determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) It is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the ratio that determines the reach notice (the ratio that determines the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set in the pachinko machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, the effect during variable display executed during the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time) always Setting suggestions are executed at a rate of 60% and reach notices are executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display effect executed in the second period (second variable display effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the ready-to-win announcement is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be made to expect the execution of the setting suggestion in the same way.

In addition, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, there are more opportunities to provide reach notices and setting suggestions in one variable display, which improves interest. .

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than during the variable display (for example, the ending of the jackpot game state or the variable display However, when the player is playing the game, it is during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention. Therefore, in the effect during variable display in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, it is possible not only to execute the setting suggestion during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention to, but also as in the second embodiment. As described above, by enabling the effect during variable display to be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to not only increase the chances of executing the setting suggestion, but also to increase the chances of executing the setting suggestions. If it is executed at a rate higher than , it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the ready-to-win announcement in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the ready-to-win announcement even in the variation pattern of the big win.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and non-execution of neither reach announcement nor setting suggestion may be determined in at least one of the first period and the second period.

In the case where non-execution can be determined in this way, even if the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the reach announcement must be different between the first period and the second period. can let Further, even if the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be the same between the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the second invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When it is possible to execute either setting suggesting effect, no consideration is given as to which effect is given priority, and when the control is in an advantageous state, the setting suggesting effect that makes the set value is executed, etc. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance becomes inappropriate. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the second invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display setting suggestion based on, or a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 can be executed),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21 as a second embodiment As shown, during variable display of normal reach or super reach, the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times than when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times among the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a higher rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 The reach based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is better in the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period than in the case of executing the effect during variable display. The part where the notice is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to one game result.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-22, in the effect during variable display executed in the second period, the ready-to-reach notice is more likely to be executed than in the effect during variable display executed in the first period. It is possible to heighten expectations for being controlled to the big win game state during the second period, which is closer to the end timing of the variable display than the first period.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode at a rate lower than the rate of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period during the second period after the first period. A part that executes a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns, at a lower rate when executing a variable display effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation for an advantageous state by making it easier to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a timing close to one game result.

Specifically, even if non-execution of the variable display effect cannot be determined, it is possible to determine the ready-to-win notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined effect execution means is
When executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as a second embodiment Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is changed to the special pattern PT- 8 or the part that runs at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period, the reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is changed to the specific pattern pattern PT-1 to The part that runs at a higher rate than suggested by any of the PT-7)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, while the predetermined effect of the specific mode is less likely to be executed. It is possible to suitably increase the sense of expectation.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and the effect control as shown in FIG. The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern by executing the effect processing during variable display),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can perform The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a special aspect or a specific aspect of the predetermined effect in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-21, a mode is exemplified in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the ready-to-win effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect during variable display may be executed even during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and the effect control as shown in FIG. The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is Part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-reading notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform reach notice and setting suggestion). When both are executable, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, when displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider, the paraglider in which the character appears moves image, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player for execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the third invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect during variable display),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode for suggesting settings (for example, setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4), and settings and types suggested by the first suggestion mode. A second suggestion mode (for example, setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-7) that makes suggestions regarding different settings of
When the predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing both the predetermined effect of the first suggested mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggested mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as the second embodiment shown in FIG. As shown in 9-21, during variable display of normal reach and super reach), when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times, the predetermined effect is executed later than the first number out of a plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode can be executed at a higher rate (for example, FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26 and FIGS. 9-28 to 9 As shown in -31, when the production control CPU 120 can execute the production during variable display in the first period and the second period during the variable display of normal reach or super reach as the second or third embodiment, The part where the setting suggestion (strong) is executed at a higher rate when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period than when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined performance is repeatedly executed, the execution of the predetermined performance of the second suggestive mode becomes easier, so that the player's expectation for the execution of the predetermined performance of the second suggestive mode is maintained. can be done.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, in the effect during variable display executed during the second period, the setting suggestion (strong) is made more than the effect during variable display executed during the first period. is easily executed, it is possible to keep the player's expectation for the high set value such as 4 to 6 set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting the setting, suggests the odd number setting or the even number setting, and the first suggestion The setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode that makes a suggestion about a setting different in type from the setting suggested by the mode, is a mode that suggests an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The set value suggested by the mode and the set value suggested by the second suggestion mode may all be different set values (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests the set value 1 and the second suggestion mode suggests the set value 1). If the value 6 is suggested, or if the first suggestion mode suggests odd settings 1, 3, 5 and the second suggestion mode suggests even settings 2, 4, 6, etc.), the first suggestion mode suggests Both the setting value suggested by the second suggestion mode and the setting value suggested by the second suggestion mode may include a common setting value (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests setting values 1 to 4, and the second suggestion mode is When suggesting set values 3 to 6 above the middle), even if one of the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode is a suggestion regarding a setting change, and the other is a suggestion regarding a setting value that has been set. good. In other words, not only when the set values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also when there are a plurality of set values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode, the settings to be suggested Including those with different numbers and ranges of values, and those with different suggested contents.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means specifies when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, including the first suggestive mode and the second suggestive mode. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period. Portion where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same rate in the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be similarly expected.

Specifically, after setting the execution ratio of all setting suggestions to be the same in the first period and the second period (or a lower ratio in the second period than in the first period), the effect during variable display in the first period By executing the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing , avoiding excessive setting suggestions At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the high set value.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined effect execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on a special pattern pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state,
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a rate higher than the rate of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode in the first number of times (e.g., Embodiment 2 As shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period rather than executing the effect during variable display in the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the ratio of execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode increases, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to one game result.

Note that, in the second embodiment, if the execution ratio of all setting suggestions is the same between the first period and the second period, setting suggestions (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, it is possible to execute the reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7 The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can perform The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a special aspect or a specific aspect of the predetermined effect in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7 The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is Part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-reading notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are executable, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, when displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider, the paraglider in which the character appears moves image, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Fourth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21 as the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. part),
When executing the predetermined effect in a first number of times out of a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect in a second number of times after the first number of times out of a plurality of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and after the first period. The part where the ratio of executing the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 differs between the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period of )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the probability of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode differs between the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during variable display at a higher rate than the execution of the ready-to-win notice in the first period, while in the second period , by determining the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during the variable display at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, which is the timing close to the variable display result, Since the ready-to-win notice is easily executed, the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced. In addition, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions may be determined at a lower rate than the reach notice execution, while in the second period, the setting suggestions may be decided at a higher rate than the reach notice execution. .

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period, pattern PT-8. Or the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

In addition, in the second embodiment, if non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the ready-to-reach notice can be made the same while the setting suggestion execution ratio is different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, As shown in FIG. 9-22 as a second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and during the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the production)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, in the first period, while determining the execution of the setting suggestion at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, in the second period, by determining the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate lower than the execution of the reach notice In the second period, which is the timing close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but it is also easy to execute the ready-to-win notice, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display in the period, regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the effect control CPU 120 Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate regardless of the set value when executing the effect during variable display in the second period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fifth invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21 as the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. part),
When the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set and when the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, a plurality of times. Among them, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the same rate in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, and the effect during the variable display executed in the second period is set regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes suggestions at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first set value or the second set value is set, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times does not change, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode does not change. You can expect the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-22 to 9-26, even if any value from 1 to 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, it is executed in the first period. The ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display and the ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display that is executed in the second period do not change, that is, the set value is Since the situation of setting suggestions is the same regardless of whether the low setting value or the high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the setting value depending on the appearance situation of the setting suggestions.

In the second embodiment, even if any value from 1 to 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display executed in the first period. Although the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display executed in the second period does not change from the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestions are executed during the second period is exemplified, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a ratio (appearance situation) at which a setting suggestion is executed as a variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2) out of a plurality of setting values 1 to 6; If the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display executed in the second period is the same, setting values other than the two setting values (for example, 3 to 6) are set in the second period. The rate at which setting suggestions are executed (appearance situation) may not be the same between the first period and the second period.

Further, the setting values 1 to 6 are set in the pachinko game machine 1 only in one of the variable display performance executed in the first period and the variable display performance executed in the second period. Regardless of which value is set, the ratio (appearance situation) of setting suggestion as a variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period The ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestions are executed may be the same.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period) , the part that executes the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effects of the mode at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the second period). The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is executed at a different rate in the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-22 as the second embodiment, variable Regarding the effect during display, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the effect during variable display executed during the second period is set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes the reach notice at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

More specifically, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 6, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set Depending on the setting value that is set in the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 at a different rate, and the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. Part that executes reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates according to the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any period other than the above can be set as long as it is a period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display until the variable display result is displayed. For example, the first period is from the start to the end of Normal Reach, the second period is from the start to the end of Super Reach, or the first period is from the start of Normal Reach or Super Reach, and the second period is Normal Reach. Or until the end of the super reach, the variation pattern temporarily stops the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then restarts the variable display, so that one variable display is simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo-continuous variation pattern with a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like variable display, the first period is the start timing of the first re-variable display, and the second period is the start timing of the second re-variable display. , may correspond to the re-variable display period.
(Example 3)

In the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and if the effect during variable display is the same number of times, reach regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The form which determines execution of an advance notice and execution of a setting suggestion in the same ratio was illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. In the case of making it possible to execute times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 even if the same number of variable display performances are performed. You may

It should be noted that, when the execution of the effect during variable display is determined, as shown in FIGS. Execution of the setting suggestion and the reach notice is determined at the same ratio with the effect during the variable display executed in .

Here, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 and 9-29, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed is determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. -8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 30% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined at a rate of 63% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and a rate of 2%. decided on pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35% advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 35%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 1.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 40%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 45% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined at a rate of 47% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and a rate of 3%. decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 45%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5% advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 3.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. 4. Effect types (effect patterns) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period are determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {suggestion of setting (low)} at a rate of 41.5%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 50%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 55% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5% advance notice (high)}.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-30 and 9-31, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is super reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 17.5%, pattern PT at a rate of 17.5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 30% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. PT-4 {Suggestion of setting (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 1.2%, pattern PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 20% The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. , Pattern PT5 ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 1.5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (high)}, 22.5% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 22.5%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 22.5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined at a rate of 2.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} determined at a rate of 5%, 40 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 2% determined to be one of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (high)}, 25% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%; 5% decided to pattern PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 45% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 3.5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (high)}, 27.5% At a rate of 27.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 27.5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , Pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} determined at a rate of 5%, 50 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, 5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 30% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, during the first period Patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion of set value (low) or suggestion of setting (high)} are determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the second period, and the variable display executed in the second period. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type of the medium effect is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the same manner is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the ready-to-win announcement is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period or the second period, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second set value. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion of setting value (low) or suggestion of setting value (high)} are determined as the effect type is different when the setting value (for example, setting value 6) is set. , 1st set value or 2nd set value, the appearance state of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period is changed, so that the performance during the variable display can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period, a pattern is used as the effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases. The ratio of PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is reduced, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( high)} is determined. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is set with high setting values (for example, 5, 6), the setting suggestions are higher than when the pachinko game machine 1 is set with low setting values (for example, 1 to 4). is difficult to execute, it is difficult for a player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment as well, the pattern PT-9 is used as the effect type for the during-variable-display effect executed in the second period rather than the during-variable-display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {suggestion of setting (high)} is determined is set high. In other words, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the ready-to-reach notice based on the pattern PT-9, so that the player's expectation for the effect during the variable display being executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. can be made

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-27, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, during the variable display executed in the first period The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} are determined is the same between the effect and the effect during variable display executed in the second period, Pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined in the same form, but the present invention is not limited to this. , even if the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {Set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be different, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} may be determined differently.

In the third embodiment, the effects during variable display are the same when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period. Although the mode of executing the setting suggestion is exemplified by the ratio, the present invention is not limited to this. The setting suggestion may be executed at a different rate as the effect during the variable display depending on whether the effect during the variable display is executed. By doing so, the ratio (appearance rate) at which setting suggestions are executed changes between when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-27, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the first period (the first variable display during the effect) and the variable display during the second period. When the ready-to-win notice is executed as a middle effect (second variable display-in-time effect), an example is shown in which the ready-to-win notice is executed at a different rate according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the reach notice is executed as (second variable display effect), the reach notice is given at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 if the same number of variable display effect is performed. may be executed. By doing so, if the performance during the variable display is the same number of times, the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed (appearance situation) does not change according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. , the player can be made to expect the execution of the ready-to-win notice without change between the performance during variable display executed in the first period and the performance during variable display executed in the second period.

(Sixth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following sixth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a portion that can execute the effect during variable display in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect),
When executing the predetermined effect in a first number of times out of a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect in a second number of times after the first number of times out of a plurality of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed. It is possible to execute at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as a third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and The part where the setting suggestions are executed at the same rate as in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period later)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be similarly expected.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-27, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio (65% in the example shown in FIG. 9-27) as the medium production, the variable display medium production executed in the first period and the variable display medium production executed in the second period are set. Players can similarly expect suggestions to be implemented.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the middle effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, A pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period is a special pattern rather than the effect during the variable display in the first period. The part that executes a high percentage of reach announcements based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the third embodiment, if non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the ready-to-reach announcement can be made different between the first period and the second period while making the execution ratio of the setting suggestion the same.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, Regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the case where the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period , regardless of the set value, the part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

More specifically, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 6, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the effect control CPU 120 is the second period Part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value when executing the effect during variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Seventh invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following seventh invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, a portion where the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect),
When the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set and when the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, a plurality of times. Among them, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a different rate in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. If executed, the part that can execute setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 at different rates according to the set values)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on whether the first set value or the second set value is set, the state of appearance of the predetermined performance of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times changes, so that the predetermined performance can be suppressed from becoming monotonous. .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 to 9-31, depending on which of 1 to 6 the value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is, the effect control CPU 120 is variably displayed in the first period. Since the setting suggestion execution ratio (appearance situation) changes between when the middle effect is executed and when the variable display during effect is executed in the second period, the player can obtain not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the setting value according to the appearance situation of the setting suggestion in .

The gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the first period and the second The part that can execute the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate as the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at different ratios (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period, Part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, Regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the case where the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period , regardless of the set value, the part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

More specifically, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 6, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the effect control CPU 120 is the second period Part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value when executing the effect during variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
(Example 4)

In Example 2 and Example 3 of the characterizing part 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display. and the second period each based on the fluctuation pattern and the setting value to determine which one of the reach notice and setting suggestion is to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for the first period determines whether to execute reach notice or setting suggestion based on the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while for the second period, reach notice and setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and set value It may be determined which one is to be executed, that is, whether the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period is to be executed based on different judgment criteria.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-32 as a fourth embodiment, the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach are targeted, and the first period and the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of normal reach are displayed. A performance during variable display can be executed in a second period after one period. It should be noted that the non-reach and small hit variation patterns require a short variable display time to execute the effect during variable display two or more times. is limited to

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, if the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period, For the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the variation pattern. 9-33, the processing for determining effect during variable display in the fourth embodiment will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 9-33, in the process of determining effects during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies a variation pattern (103SGS311). The variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. Next, determine whether the specified variation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), proceed to 103SG313 in the case of normal reach or super reach, and if other than normal reach or super reach, that is, non-reach or small hit variation pattern In this case, since it is not subject to the effect during variable display, the process for determining the effect during variable display is terminated.

In 103SGS312, when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (103SGS313). Next, based on the setting value specified in 103SGS313, whether or not to execute the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) in the case of execution are determined in a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown) ( common to normal reach and super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 9-34 (A), in 103SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 uses a variable display effect execution determination table common to normal reach or super reach, and uses reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Decide on either Specifically, when the set value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, determines setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and non-execution at a rate of 10%. Decide on a percentage. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, execution of reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set It is set so that the larger the value, the higher the setting suggestion execution ratio and the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-35, focusing on the determination ratio of the effect type during variable display in the first period, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the first period The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed at the rate of 20% is decided to be non-execution, and the ratio of 39% is decided to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}. Then, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} are determined at a rate of 1%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

40. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 18%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 8%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 1.2%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

43. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 15%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 1.5%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 12.5%, Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 45.5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

46. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 10%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 3.5%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 40% to determine the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 9-33, at 103SGS314, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display in the first period is determined (103SGS315). -9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and an effect execution determination flag during variable display indicating that execution of the effect during variable display in the first period is determined is set (103SGS317), Go to 103SGS318. If execution is not determined at 103SGS315, that is, if non-execution is determined, the process proceeds to 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is the normal reach (103SGS318), and when it is determined as the normal reach, based on the specified variation pattern and the set value, the second Whether or not to execute the effect during variable display during the period and the type of effect (effect pattern) in the case of execution are determined using a not shown effect execution determination table during variable display (for normal reach) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 9-34(B), at 103SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect execution determination table during variable display for normal reach, and determines any of reach advance notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, in the case of the set value 1, determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and does not execute at a rate of 5%. Decide on a percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and setting suggestion are determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( High) is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-36, focusing on the case of normal reach for the determination ratio of the notice effect type during variable display in the second period, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 determines that the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion ( Decided to pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, At a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined.

32. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 8%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2.2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

32. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 3%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55% , the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

30. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Pattern PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 4.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 6%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55% , the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when it is determined in 103SGS318 that the variation pattern is not the normal reach, that is, the super reach, based on the specified variation pattern and the set value, whether or not to execute the effect during the variable display in the second period, and the execution The type of effect (effect pattern) to be used is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 9-34(C), at 103SGS320, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect execution determination table during variable display for super reach, and determines any of reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution. . Specifically, in the case of the set value 1 and the set value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute do not decide Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and setting suggestion are determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( High) is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-36, focusing on the case of super ready-to-win with respect to the determination ratio of the notice effect type during variable display in the second period, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In the case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined at a rate of 36% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and 4% Decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate, determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-9 {at a rate of 55% reach notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 4.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)} decided, 5% of the pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined, 5% of the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 33.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 6.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)} decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 8%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 5% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 9-33, in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display in the second period is determined (103SGS321), and if execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1 to PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and a variable display effect execution determination flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined is set (103SGS323 ), ending the effect during variable display. If execution is not determined in 103SGS321, that is, if non-execution is determined, the effect during variable display is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, regardless of whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the set value is 1 to 6, and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, it is determined whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Determine reach warnings or setting suggestions based on separate decision tables. That is, since the criteria for determining which of the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion are to be executed are different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the production during variable display from becoming monotonous.

In addition, since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the first period, while the reach announcement is made in the second period Since it is easier to execute, setting suggestions will not be likely to be executed in both the first period and the second period, even though it will be normal reach or super reach in the second period, and Since the reach advance notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

In addition, since the execution ratio of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution ratio of the reach notice in the first period, the reach notice is executed in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to suppress the middle production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 9-35 to 9-37, focusing on each setting value, when executing the variable display effect in the first period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 Execution of the reach notice is determined at the same ratio (40%), and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. It is determined by the same ratio (60%). For this reason, regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, in the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period, The player's attention can be drawn in the same way.

Also, even if the setting value is high (for example, setting value 5, 6, etc.), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion in the second period, but the super reach In this case, since the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation for the big win from being lowered.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than the case where the setting suggestion is decided in the first period, so the setting suggestion in the super reach is executed, the player's expectations for the high setting can be heightened.

In addition, in the first period, when the setting value is 1, execution of the reach notice and setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the setting value is 6, that is, when the setting values are 1, 2, The higher the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestions than the reach notice. easier to predict.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-34, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time) and in the second period. Although the execution of the ready-to-reach notice is determined at a different rate between when the effect during variable display (the effect during variable display for the second time) is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the execution of the ready-to-win notice at the same ratio between when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. . By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect the execution of the ready-to-win announcement in the same manner in the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect.

Further, in the present embodiment 4, as shown in FIG. 9-34, if the same number of variable display effects are performed, the ready-to-win notice is executed at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Although the mode of determination is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the effect during the variable display of the same number of times, execution of the reach notice according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be determined in different proportions. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the execution of the same effect type in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect is monotonous. You can prevent it from becoming

(8th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following eighth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit" in the variable pattern setting process of S111). A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not);
Variable display means capable of executing variable display according to the determined variable display pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect process during variable display, displays the decorative pattern based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. the part that performs variable display) and
Predetermined effect determination means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes of a predetermined effect (for example, in the variable display effect determination process, patterns PT-1 to PT-9 are selected as the effect pattern of the variable display effect. the part that determines one from
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as effect during variable display Setting suggestion, or part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
with
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-32 as a fourth embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. ),
Based on at least the set value that is set, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-33 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control A part where the CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value that is set in the variable display effect in the first period),
Based on at least the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times is determined (for example, in the embodiment As shown in FIG. 9-33 as 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the effect during variable display based on the set value and the variation pattern set in the effect during variable display in the second period. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the criteria for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect are different between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-33, when determining the effect type of the effect during variable display in the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time), the effect during variable display is determined based on the variation pattern of the variable display. Determines the effect type of the effect * Isn't it a set value? (See 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the effect type of the effect during variable display in the second period (second effect during variable display), the variation pattern of the variable display and the setting set in the pachinko game machine 1 Based on the value, the type of effect during variable display is determined (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). That is, since the criteria for determining the type of effect are different between the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect, the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect are different. , the execution of the same effect type is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. parts that run at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, 9-34 as a fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period, and the pattern PT -8 or the part that executes reach notices based on pattern PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-34 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display during the period, regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the effect control CPU 120 is the first Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate regardless of the set value when executing variable display production in 2 periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set A part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and when the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the first period, regardless of whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, a form of determining whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according to the setting value is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the variation pattern, it is determined whether to execute setting suggestion or reach notice only according to the set value. may

In addition, in the second period, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach prior to the setting suggestion, but the present invention is not limited to this Instead, in the second period, depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, reach notice and setting suggestion may be determined at the same rate.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the second period, the form of determining whether to execute reach notice or setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach was exemplified, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and in the second period, not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit, either reach notice or setting suggestion is executed. You may make it determine whether.

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the characterizing portion 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variable display is started for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. A mode in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period from the timing to the start timing of the normal reach effect and the second period after the first period has been exemplified, but the present invention is this. However, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then resuming the variable display, one variable display is pseudo-variably displayed a plurality of times. It may be executed at the timing according to the re-variation of the decoration pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect that looks like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 9-38 as a modification 2, for all variation patterns of non-reach/small hit, normal reach and super reach, from the start timing of variable display to the start timing of normal reach reach production a first period before the temporary stop of the first decoration pattern, a second period after the first period and corresponding to a re-variable display period after the first temporary stop of the decoration pattern, The effect during variable display can be executed in the third period which is after the second period and corresponds to the re-variable display period after the temporary stop of the decoration pattern for the third time.

In addition, in this modification 2, the first period is exemplified before the temporary stop of the first decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first period. Executed according to the re-variable display at the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the second period is executed according to the re-variable display at the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the third period is executed according to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern. It may be executed according to the re-variable display.

In this modification 2, in the above-described effect determination process during variable display, for the first period, regardless of which variation pattern, any one of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 , and for the second period and the third period, variable display based on the set value only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach A process for determining the type of presentation is executed.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the variation pattern (does not determine execution of the reach notice). It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio. In the second period, only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, execution of reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and execution of setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, execution of reach notice is decided at a rate of 100%, and execution of setting suggestion is not decided. It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period By setting the ratio of determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period or the second period is performed. When executing the effect during variable display in three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. In other words, since the determination criteria for the performance control CPU 120 to determine the performance mode of the predetermined performance are different between the first period, the second period, and the third period, it is possible to prevent the performance during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a variation pattern in which the degree of expectation for a big hit increases as the number of times of re-variable display increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, and so on. Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first re-variable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second re-variable In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is also the possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice, and the third re-variable In the third period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is super reach, so the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

In this way, in the case of a variation pattern involving one or two pseudo-continuous performances, it is possible to suggest settings while suppressing the decrease in the reliability of the ready-to-win announcement due to frequent occurrence of the ready-to-win announcement. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectation for the big win due to frequent occurrence of setting suggestion in the case of the variation pattern accompanied by three pseudo-continuous performances.

In addition, in the second modification, in the first period in which the reliability of the jackpot is the lowest, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, rather than the reach notice, so the setting suggestion is preferable. On the other hand, in the second and third periods in which the reliability of the jackpot is higher than in the first period, the reach notice is set according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Since the decision is made with priority, the player's expectation for the big win can be favorably increased.

In addition, in this modified example 2, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a rate of 100%, but in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice. If there is, it does not have to be the one that determines the execution of setting suggestions at a rate of 100%. Also, in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice, but the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Also, in the third period, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified at a rate of 100%, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, the reach notice It does not have to be a 100% decision on execution.

Further, in this modification 2, in the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value with priority over the reach notice, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern Although the execution of the reach notice is determined according to whether it is normal reach or super reach with priority over the setting suggestion, the present invention is not limited to this, the first period and the second period , regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value with priority over the reach notice, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be determined with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the setting value with priority over the reach notice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of In the first number of times (e.g., the first period or the second period), at least if the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the setting value, the setting suggestion or according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern You may make it determine reach notice.

In addition, in the present modification 2, in the second period and the third period, according to the setting value and the variation pattern, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified prior to the setting suggestion, but the present invention is to this It is not limited, and in the second number of times (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number of times among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or the reach notice may be determined according to the setting value and the variation pattern.

Further, in Embodiments 2 to 4, as an effect during the variable display executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is determined by making the rate at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined higher than the rate at which the ready-to-reach notice is determined. Although a form in which priority is given to execution is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. As for the effect, the setting suggestion may be preferentially determined according to the order of the processing for determining the effect type.

Further, in Embodiments 2 to 4, as the effect during the variable display executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined is set higher than the rate at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although a form in which execution is prioritized is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. As an effect, execution of the ready-to-win announcement may be preferentially determined according to the order of processing for determining the effect type.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the effects during variable display can be executed multiple times in one variable display. It may be executable over the variable display (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 suspends and stores information (for example, display results (including jackpot types), random numbers for determining variation patterns, etc.) related to variable display whose execution is suspended when a starting prize is generated. , and the display result and the fluctuation pattern are prefetched and determined based on the extracted random value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as the effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 If it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that predicts the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended), the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice A reach notice or a setting suggestion may be executed as a pre-read notice for the target change over a plurality of times of variable display until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the plurality of images Z1 showing the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 during the variable display effect at predetermined timings. A form of executing the process of changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the middle production determination process to the image Z2 indicating that the images will be destroyed and dropped has been exemplified, but the present invention has been described. is not limited to this, and when the player's operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 changes at the timing corresponding to the operation. You can let it run.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player in the variable display effect as described above, the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the operation valid period of the push button 31B is performed. An operation prompting image (for example, a character image or a button image that says “Continue hitting!”) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect.

Further, when the push sensor 35B detects a specific action of operating the push button 31B during the operation effective period of the push button 31B, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is being operated, an effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying and dropping the paraglider) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B was not detected. In some cases, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be ended without performing reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, a player who knows the specific action can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, as an operation promoting effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the effective period of operation of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the operation promoting effect is executed by emitting light from a light-emitting part built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific action or the player who has noticed the light emission can see the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state indication result, a form is exemplified in which a reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a reach is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, the predetermined effects that result in the indication of an advantageous state include a stop symbol notice suggesting which pattern the variable display will stop at, a character notice that a character will appear, and a step in which the notice image changes step by step. Various advance notice effects can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects suggesting the possibility of a big hit, such as an advance notice, a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area, and the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common effect period common to the reach notice and the setting suggestion. It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is suggested using a character, the setting suggestion is suggested by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the advance notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion different from the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 in the same period (at the same timing). In this case, the visibility of the first effect image can be improved by, for example, making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image, or by differentiating the display mode such as the emission color, brightness, contrast, etc. is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image in a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn in the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers, and the setting When the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion is drawn on the second drawing layer which is lower than the first drawing layer, the image drawn on the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer on the image display device 5 are drawn. When the first effect image is overlapped and displayed on the second effect image, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image. By doing so, it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. Furthermore, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is set higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance of the second effect image (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is also possible to execute the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound modes such as the volume and quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. , that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement may be more audible than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of enhancing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only increasing the volume of the sound effect, but also decreasing the volume of other sounds such as BGM to increase the audibility. good too. It should be noted that there are cases where the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Furthermore, when the production control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the production sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any one of the reproduction channels , for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the ready-to-win notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. In addition, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (the first reproduction channel and the second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced on the first reproduction channel The audibility of the first effect sound is made higher than the audibility of the second effect sound by making the volume and sound quality different from (improving) the volume and sound quality of the second effect sound reproduced on the second reproduction channel, It is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, by changing the light emission mode such as the color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 between the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light-emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win notice is changed to the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. In other words, the light emission mode corresponding to the reach advance notice may be made more visible than the light emission mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. In addition, the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off in response to the setting suggestion.

In other words, when the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, the production result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In addition to increasing the execution ratio of the reach notice in the case, when the production result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the production mode such as the display, sound, and light of the reach notice is higher than the production mode of the setting suggestion Including priority etc. Furthermore, executing the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, sound , light, and movement of movable bodies.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion indicates which of the setting values 1 to 6 is set as the setting suggestion in the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may be, for example, a suggestion of the possibility that the setting value has been changed or the possibility that the setting value has not been changed (deferred).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. High base state (time saving state) where conditions are likely to be established, high probability game state (high probability state) with high probability of becoming a jackpot game state, high probability low base state (latent probability variable state), special reach state (for example , super reach, etc.), including a state where the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on a big hit variation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the contents are stored. In addition, since scores and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

In the slot machine, a state that is advantageous to the player means a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus that increases the probability of winning a small combination, or a state in which an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is announced (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ), and a state in which an advantageous operation mode for the player is notified and the probability of winning a replay combination increases (for example, ART (Assist Replay Time) state).

In addition, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed in a slot machine, a special combination such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the combination of symbols is not complete and the special combination is carried over. Suggestion effects suggesting the possibility that the combination of corresponding symbols will be derived and displayed, setting suggestions suggesting the setting value set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (multiple variable displays), AT state It is possible to execute over a plurality of games (multiple times of variable display) from the time an ART state is won until the AT state or ART state is started.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 129SG of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 129SG of this embodiment will be described. Although the details will be described later, this characteristic part 129SG is capable of executing a special suggestive effect that notifies that the game state is controlled to a big win during the variable display, and the execution ratio of the special suggestive effect and the effect after the special suggestive effect. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested by the execution ratio of the predetermined effect. Since the characterizing portion 129SG performs partially the same processing as the characterizing portion 103SG, only processing different from the characterizing portion 103SG will be described below.

In addition, in this characteristic part 129SG, a form in which the contents of the characteristic part 103SG (a form suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the production pattern during variable display) is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the contents of the characterizing portion 129SG and the contents of the characterizing portion 103SG disclosed below may be performed in duplicate.

The characteristic portion 129SG will be described below with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-10.

First, FIG. 10-1 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the characteristic portion 129SG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-1, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag indicating that the first variable display start command has been received is set. (129 SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set, it is associated with the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer (not shown) at the time of start winning The various command data and various flags stored in the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (129SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (129SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set, the process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is set, the second variable display start command reception buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the special figure reservation storage are shifted upward by one buffer number (099SGS374). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing 129SGS272 or 129SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads a variation pattern designation command that designates a variation pattern from the variation pattern designation command storage area (129SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop pattern) of the decoration pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the variable display result specifying command specifying the variable display result) (129SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the variable display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Store. The variation pattern designation command and the variable display result designation command are commands sent to the performance control CPU 120 (performance control board 12) when the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process (S111).

In addition, in the characteristic part 129SG, when the received variable display result designation command is a variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that three symbols are odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols. A combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is a variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, a combination of decorative patterns in which 3 patterns are even-numbered patterns as a stop pattern ( determine the jackpot pattern). Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to loss, a combination of decorative patterns (lost pattern) in which three patterns are not aligned is determined as a stop pattern.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 specifies a variation pattern from the variation pattern designation command read at 129SGS275, and determines whether or not the specified variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (129SGS277). If the specified variation pattern is not the variation pattern of super reach, proceed to the processing of 129SGS287, and if the specified variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach, specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 (129 SGS278). It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 receives a set value designation command from the CPU 103 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and stores the set value specified from the set value designation command in the RAM 122. It is sufficient to specify the stored setting value.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect suggesting a big hit in the variable display based on the set value specified in 129SGS 278 or the result of the variable display, and the effect pattern of the chance-up effect. (129SGS279).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (129SGS503), and if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable display result Whether or not to execute the chance-up effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the set value specified as the big hit (129SGS304). Further, when the variable display result is a loss, whether or not to execute a chance-up effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the set value specified as the variable display result being a loss (129SGS305).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-3, a total of four patterns from pattern CU-1 to pattern CU-4 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 129SGS304 and 129SGS305. Of these production patterns, pattern CU-1 is a production pattern indicating that the degree of expectation for big win is low (expectation for big win: low), and pattern CU-2 has a higher degree of expectation for big win than pattern CU-1 (big hit expectation). Expectation level: high) This is a production pattern indicating that. Pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4 are effect patterns for notifying that the variable display result is a big win. Pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4 are both effect patterns for notifying that the variable display result will be a big hit, but the effect modes are different.

As shown in FIG. 10-4(A), in the process of 129SGS304 described above, the effect control CPU 120, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, gives a chance-up effect at a rate of 39%. decided not to execute, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and It decides to execute the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-3 at the rate of 1%, and decides to execute the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of 1%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the chance-up performance is not executed at a rate of 38%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. decided to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, decided to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and decided to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 2%. It is determined that the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of . Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 37%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. decided to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, decided to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and decided to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 3%. It is determined that the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of .

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines non-execution of the chance-up effect at a rate of 36%, and executes the chance-up effect at a rate of 10%. The pattern CU-1 is determined to be executed, the chance-up performance is determined to be executed in the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%. , and decides to execute the chance-up effect in pattern CU-4 at a rate of 4%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 35%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. decided to execute the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, decided to perform the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and decided to perform the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 5%. It is determined that the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of . Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 34%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. decided to execute the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, decided to perform the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and decided to perform the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 6%. It is determined that the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), in the process of 129SGS304 described above, the effect control CPU 120 performs a chance-up effect at a rate of 50% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , decides to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 40%, decides to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 10%, and 0 It decides to execute the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-3 at the rate of 0%, and decides to execute the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of 0%.

That is, in the characteristic portion 129SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state is low when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-1 (the degree of expectation for the big win is low). In addition, when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, the ratio of control to the big win game state is high (high expectation of big win). Furthermore, when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, the game is always controlled to a big win game state. In addition, the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 is common (uniformly 10%) regardless of the set value, whereas the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4 is It is set so that it increases as the set value increases. That is, in this characteristic part 129SG, the total ratio of the chance-up effect executed in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio executed in the pattern CU-4 differs according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In particular, the set value is suggested by the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4.

Incidentally, the chance-up effect in this feature part 129SG is a effect in which a character appears on the image display device 5 during the ready-to-win effect, and the content of the character's dialogue suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit (see FIG. 10-9). ), the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up effect may be a performance that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win according to the contents of the character's lines, as long as the degree of expectation for the big win can be suggested to the player. No need.

In addition, the determination ratio of the effect pattern (pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4) for notifying that the chance-up effect in the present characteristic portion 129SG is controlled to the jackpot game state is as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A). 11% when the set value is 1, 12% when the set value is 2, 13% when the set value is 3, 14% when the set value is 4, and 15% when the set value is 5. %, and when the set value is 6, it is 16%. Therefore, the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the effect pattern for reporting that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, and the pachinko game machine. It is set to increase as the set value set to 1 increases.

Returning to FIG. 10-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the chance-up effect is determined after executing the processing of 129SGS304 or 129SGS305 (129SGS306). If the execution of the chance-up performance is not determined, the chance-up performance determination processing is terminated, and if the execution of the chance-up performance is determined, the determined performance pattern is stored (129SGS307) and the chance-up performance is stored. A chance-up effect execution determination flag indicating that the execution of is decided is set, and the chance-up effect execution processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 10-1, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the chance-up effect execution determination flag is set (129SGS280) after executing the chance-up effect determination process (129SGS279). If not set, proceed to 129SGS283, and if the chance-up effect execution determination flag is set, set a value corresponding to the period until the start of the chance-up effect to the chance-up effect start town timer (129SGS281) ), clear the chance-up effect execution determination flag, and proceed to 129SGS283 (129SGS282).

The effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the timer for waiting to start the chance-up effect each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and the chance-up effect is executed based on the fact that the timer for waiting to start the chance-up effect has timed up. A process table for the chance-up effect may be set according to the effect pattern. Also, after setting the process table for the chance-up effect, the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, effect lamp 9, etc.) are set in accordance with the value of the process timer for the chance-up effect each time the effect process during variable display is executed. ) to execute the chance-up effect.

Then, the effect control CPU 120, as the process of 129SGS283, determines whether or not execution in the effect pattern (pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4) of the jackpot notification of the chance-up effect is determined. When the performance pattern of the chance-up performance is not decided, the process proceeds to 129 SGS288, and when the performance pattern of the chance-up performance is decided, the pachinko game machine 1 is set. A setting value suggesting effect determination process (129SGS284) for determining whether or not to execute a set value suggesting effect suggesting a set value and determining the effect pattern of the set value suggesting effect is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting value suggestion effect and the effect pattern based on the set value (129SGS312).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-6, a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in 129SGS312. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 129SG, setting values 1 to 4 are set to be low and setting values 5 and 6 are to be high, but setting values 1 to 3 may be set to be low and setting values 4 to 6 may be set to be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the processing of 129SGS312 described above, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Decide to execute, decide to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-1 at a rate of 7.15%, and execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.35%. decided to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 0.36%, and decided to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0.14%. , decides to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, it is decided not to execute the set value suggesting effect at a rate of 85%, and the set value suggesting effect is pattern SS at a rate of 3.21%. Decided to execute with -1, decided to execute setting value suggestion effect with pattern SS-2 at a rate of 10.73%, and set value suggestion effect with pattern SS-3 at a rate of 0.21% At a rate of 0.85%, it is decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4, and at a rate of 0%, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-5. to decide. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, it determines non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect at a rate of 80%, and pattern SS of the set value suggesting effect at a rate of 11.45%. Decided to execute with -1, decided to execute setting value suggestion effect with pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.85%, set value suggestion effect with pattern SS-3 at a rate of 4.28% At a rate of 1.42%, it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4, and at a rate of 0%, the set value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-5. to decide.

In addition, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect at a rate of 75%, and sets at a rate of 3.57%. Decide to execute the value suggesting effect in pattern SS-1, decide to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 14.30%, and set value suggesting at a rate of 1.78%. It is decided to execute the effect in pattern SS-3, it is decided to execute the setting value suggesting effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 5.35%, and the setting value suggesting effect is performed in pattern SS at a rate of 0%. Decide to run at -5. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the non-execution of the setting value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS at a rate of 4.28%. Decided to execute at -1, decided to execute setting value suggestion effect with pattern SS-2 at a rate of 8.57%, set value suggestion effect at a rate of 10.73% pattern SS-3 , decides to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6.42%, and executes the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. to decide. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it determines non-execution of the setting value suggestion effect at a rate of 65%, and sets value suggestion effect pattern SS at a rate of 10.00%. Decided to execute at -1, decided to execute setting value suggestion effect with pattern SS-2 at a rate of 5.00%, set value suggestion effect at a rate of 5.00% pattern SS-3 , decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 12.50%, and executed the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 2.5%. decide to

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 129SG, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-7, in this characterizing section 129SG, the larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the rate at which execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined. there is

Incidentally, the chance-up effect and the set value suggesting effect in the characterizing part 129SG are effects that can be executed during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect during variable display of super reach, as shown in FIG. 10-8. Further, the setting value suggesting effect is a effect that can be executed only when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 that notifies the big win, as described above, and is performed after the chance-up effect. It is executable.

In addition, the setting value suggesting effect in the characteristic part 129SG suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 by displaying the image of any one or all of the plurality of characters on the image display device 5. (See FIGS. 10-10), the present invention is not limited to this, and if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, the setting value suggesting effect effect mode may not display images of any or all of the plurality of characters on the image display device 5 .

Returning to FIG. 10-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the set value suggesting effect is determined after executing the processing of 129SG312 (129SGS313). If it is decided not to execute the set value suggesting effect, the set value suggesting effect determining process is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the set value suggesting effect, the determined effect pattern is stored (129SGS314), A setting value suggesting effect execution determination flag is set, and the set value suggesting effect determination process is terminated (129SGS315).

Returning to FIG. 10-1, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value suggestion effect execution determination flag is set after executing the process of 129SGS283 (129SGS285). If the setting value suggesting effect execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to 129 SGS287, and if the set value suggesting effect execution determining flag is set, the set value suggesting effect start waiting timer is set until the set value suggesting effect start time. (129SGS286), clear the setting value suggestion effect execution determination flag, and proceed to the processing of 129SGS288 (129SGS287).

Incidentally, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the set value suggestion effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and the set value suggestion effect start waiting timer is counted up. It is sufficient to set the process table of the setting value suggestive effect according to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect. In addition, after setting the process table for setting value suggesting effect, each time the effect process during variable display is executed, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, effect lamp 9, etc.) to execute the set value suggesting effect.

At 129SGS288, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (129SGS289).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (129SGS290). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (129SGS291). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (129SGS292). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (129SGS293).

Next, the effect modes of the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10. First, when execution of the chance-up effect is determined at the start of variable display of super reach, as shown in FIGS. At , the reach effect of super reach is started. Then, when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIGS. At the same time, the dialogue corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed as the dialogue of the character.

In particular, when the chance-up performance is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, the variable display result is a big win according to the words displayed on the image display device 5, and after the variable display ends, control is made to the big win game state. to be notified.

Further, when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIGS. 10-10(A) to 10-10(F) After a specific period of time has elapsed after the chance-up effect is finished, an image of one or all characters among a plurality of characters is displayed as a set value suggesting effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-10(B) to 10-10(E), when the setting value suggestion effect is executed in patterns SS-1 to SS-4, the image display device 5, different character images are displayed. Furthermore, when the set value suggesting effect is executed in pattern SS-5 (when the set value suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode informing that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6). , all characters that can be displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting value suggestion effect is executed in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4 are displayed. For this reason, in the present characteristic portion 129SG, the player is made to pay attention to which character image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the setting value suggestion effect, and the number of character images displayed on the image display device 5 is It is possible to attract the player's attention and improve the amusement of the game.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 129SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that control is performed to the jackpot game state when the variable display result is a jackpot. A chance-up performance can be executed in a performance pattern (pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4), and the chance-up performance is executed in a performance pattern for notifying that the chance-up performance is controlled to a jackpot game state. The ratio differs according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁In other words, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested to the player according to the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the effect pattern for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the big win game state. It is designed to improve the interest of the close-up production.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 129SG, the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 in the chance-up effect are exemplified as a specific suggestive effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The specific suggestion effect is "displaying (derived display ), there is no particular limitation as long as it is an effect that notifies that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state before the game is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 129SG, as shown in FIG. 10-4, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more the chance-up effect is controlled to the big win game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The ratio of execution in the production pattern for informing that control is performed may be low.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 129SG, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the effect control CPU 120 is a pattern CU-3 which is an effect pattern for notifying that the game is controlled to a big hit game state during the reach effect of super reach. Alternatively, after executing the chance-up effect in pattern CU-4, it is possible to further execute the setting value suggesting effect, and the execution ratio of the setting value suggesting effect is set in the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 10-7. Since the set value is set so as to be higher as the set value is larger, the player can be made to pay attention to the execution of the set value suggesting performance after the chance up performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the characteristic portion 129SG, patterns CU-3 and CU-4 of the chance-up effect are used as the special suggestive effect in the present invention, and the predetermined effect in the present invention is a setting value suggestive effect that is different from the chance-up effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A predetermined effect may be executed as a series of effects. Further, as the predetermined effect different from the special suggestive effect and the effect mode, for example, it may be applied to an effect such as a ready-to-win effect of super reach, which is not necessarily an effect to notify that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 129SG, the chance-up effect can be executed in patterns CU-3 and CU-4 at different ratios according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the chance-up effect can be executed. After executing pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed in both the chance-up effect and the setting value suggesting effect by executing the setting value suggesting effect. Although the form that can be suggested is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested only by the chance-up effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, as the effect pattern of the chance-up effect, two effect patterns, pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, are controlled to the jackpot game state. It is provided as a performance pattern to be notified, and the rate at which the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-3 is 10% in common regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, while the chance-up performance is provided. The rate at which the effect is executed in the pattern CU-4 differs according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加That is, in the characteristic portion 129SG, the set value is suggested by the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to which one will be executed, the interest of the suggestive effect can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 129SG, two production patterns, pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, are provided as production patterns for the chance-up production as production patterns for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. The present invention is not limited to this, and three or more performance patterns for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state may be provided as the performance pattern for the chance-up performance. Further, among the effect patterns for notifying that the jackpot game state is to be controlled, only the execution ratio of some of the effect patterns may be varied according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, The execution ratio of all production patterns may be varied according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁

Further, in the present characteristic portion 129SG, during the variable display of 1, after the pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 of the chance-up effect is executed as the special suggestive effect in the present invention, the set value suggestive effect is performed as the predetermined effect in the present invention. Although an executable form was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. After executing with one production pattern (pattern CU-3 in the example shown in FIG. 10-11), the other production pattern (in FIG. In the example shown, pattern CU-4) may be executable.

During the variable display of 1, after executing one of the performance patterns for notifying that the chance-up performance is controlled to the big win game state, the other performance pattern that notifies that the chance-up performance is controlled to the big win game state is executed. In the case where the performance pattern is executable, the content to be notified to the player may differ according to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-11, when the chance-up effect is executed only once in the pattern CU-3 during the variable display of 1, it is only controlled to the jackpot game state as in the characteristic portion 129SG. When the chance-up performance is executed twice in the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, in addition to the notification that it is controlled to the jackpot game state, the pachinko game machine 1 is also notified. It may be notified that the setting value set to is within a predetermined range (for example, a range of 4 to 6).

By doing so, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed from 4 to 6 by executing the chance-up effect with patterns CU-3 and CU-4 during the variable display of 1. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether it is either (in other words, during the variable display of 1, the number of times executed in the production pattern that informs that the chance-up production is controlled to the big win game state Therefore, the player can pay attention to whether the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6), so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-11, after executing one of the production patterns for notifying that the chance-up production is controlled to the big win game state as a special suggestive production during the variable display, the chance-up production is further executed in the big win game state. In the form that can be executed in the other production pattern for notifying that the state is controlled, the chance-up production executed first corresponds to the special suggestive production in the present invention, and the chance-up production to be executed later corresponds to the special suggestion production in the present invention. Applies to special performances.

In addition, in the present modification 129SG-1, as shown in FIG. 10-11, when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, both chance-up effects are executed. Although a form in which the execution periods do not overlap is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least part of the execution periods of both chance-up effects may overlap. That is, in the present invention, the execution of the special suggestive effect and the special effect within the specific period includes the fact that the execution period of the special suggestive effect and the execution period of the special effect do not overlap, and that the execution period of the special suggestive effect does not overlap. It includes both the execution period of the special effect and the one that at least partially overlaps.

Further, in this variation 129SG-1, as shown in FIG. 10-11, the chance-up effect is executed in patterns CU-3 and CU-4 during the variable display of 1. , The present invention is not limited to this, and both chance-up effects may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. That is, in the present invention, the execution of the special suggestion effect and the special effect within the specific period includes the execution of both chance-up effects during one variable display and the execution of both chance-up effects over a plurality of variable displays. It includes both of those in which up effects are executed. When both chance-up effects are executed during the variable display of 1, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is indicated by the number of times the chance-up effects are executed during the variable display of 1. When both chance-up effects are executed during a plurality of variable displays, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested by the number of times the chance-up effects are executed during the plurality of variable displays. do it.

In addition, in this modification 129SG-1, when the chance-up effect is executed only once in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, it is notified only that it is controlled to the jackpot game state. , a mode in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified within a predetermined range by executing the chance-up effect twice in the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 was exemplified, but the present invention The pattern CU-3 is not limited to this, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is within a predetermined range (for example, 1 , 2, or 6), and pattern CU-4 notifies that it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is set as pattern CU-4. An effect pattern may be used to notify that the value is within a range different from -3 (for example, within a range of 4 to 6). In this manner, the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are suggested more accurately by executing the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of the chance up effect 1. (In the above example, pattern CU-3 indicates that the set value is 1, 2, or 6, and pattern CU-4 indicates that the set value is 4 to 6.) The notification confirms that the set value is 6).

Furthermore, in the case where the chance-up effect is executed twice in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, whether or not the effect periods of both chance-up effects overlap or not is determined. A set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested according to the length of the overlap of the performance periods of the performance.

Further, in the characterizing section 129SG, a mode in which the chance-up effect can be executed as the suggestive effect in the present invention has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestive effect in the present invention includes a mode of effect. A step-up effect in which changes step by step can be executed, and suggested contents may differ according to the number of times (the number of stages) that the effect mode of the step-up effect changes.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 as modification 129SG-2, step-up effect can be executed during the period from the start of variable display to ready-to-reach, and only the first stage of step-up effect is executed. is non-reach, if it is executed up to the second stage, it is normal reach, if it is executed up to the third stage, it is super reach (jackpot expectation: weak), if it is executed up to the fourth stage, it is super reach (jackpot expectation : strong), respectively.

Furthermore, when the step-up effect is executed up to the fifth stage, it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and when it is executed up to the sixth stage, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is within a predetermined range (for example , range of 4 to 6). In this case, the fifth stage of the step-up effect corresponds to the special stage of the present invention, and the sixth stage of the step-up effect corresponds to the specific set value suggesting stage of the present invention. In this way, when it is notified that the step-up performance is executed up to the fifth stage and the control to the jackpot game state is notified, the step-up performance is further executed up to the sixth stage and the pachinko game machine 1 is activated. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the set value range is notified, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this variation 129SG-2, a step-up effect is executed as a suggestive effect in the present invention. In addition to those that change in order from the 3rd stage to the 4th stage, etc., there are also those that change from the 1st stage to the 4th stage without going through the 2nd stage and the 3rd stage (so-called step skipping). It may be possible. It should be noted that, in the case of executing step-skipping as a step-up effect in this way, when the execution up to the sixth step (the step suggesting the set value) is decided, the target of the step-skipping is the first step to the fourth step. While performing either one, by executing the 6th step after passing through the 5th step of notifying that the game state is always controlled to the big win game state, it is notified that the 6th step is controlled to the big win game state. It may be possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that it is the step of performing. Furthermore, in the case of executing the stage skipping, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested depending on which stage the stage skipping is to be executed.

Further, in the modification 129SG-1, pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, which are effect patterns for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state, can be executed a plurality of times. is exemplified according to the number of times pattern CU-3 or pattern CU4 is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and modification 129SG-3 is shown in FIGS. As shown in , instead of pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, pattern CU-2, which is a pattern CU-2, which is a pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, can be executed a plurality of times, and these chance-up effects are performed by pattern CU. The suggested content may differ depending on the number of times the -2 is executed.

Specifically, the period from the start of the variable display to reaching the reach, the period from reaching the reach to the start of the reach effect of super reach, and the period from the start of the reach effect of super reach to the variable display A chance-up performance can be executed once each in a period until the end (three-time chance-up performance can be executed during one variable display), and a big win is expected when the chance-up performance is executed only once. When the chance-up performance is executed twice, it is suggested that the game state will be controlled to a big win game state, and when the chance-up performance is executed three times, it is set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加It may be set so as to notify that the current set value is within a predetermined range (for example, a range of 4 to 6). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

As for the case where the suggested contents are changed according to the number of executions of the pattern CU-2, for example, when the variable display result is specified at the start of the variable display and the variable display result is a loss or a small hit. determines that the pattern CU-2 of the chance-up effect is to be executed only once. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a big hit, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is further specified. If the set value is any one of 1 to 5, the chance-up effect pattern CU-2 is determined to be executed once or twice, and if the set value is 6, the chance-up effect pattern is determined. It suffices to decide between 1 and 3 runs on CU-2.

In addition, in the case where the suggested content is changed according to the number of executions of the pattern CU-2, the number of executions of the pattern CU-2 of the chance-up effect is first determined by lottery, and the variable display result and the pachinko game are displayed. The number of times of execution may be re-determined according to the setting value set in the gaming machine 1 .

Further, in the characteristic portion 129SG, as shown in FIG. 10-4(A), when the effect pattern of the chance-up effect is determined when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the control is made to the big win game state. A pattern CU-3, which is a performance pattern to be notified, is determined at a common rate (uniformly 10%) regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, while informing that the game is controlled to a big win game state. By determining the pattern CU-4 as a performance pattern at different ratios according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, the performance pattern notifies that the chance-up performance is controlled to the big winning game state. Although the execution ratio differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modification 129SG-4 is shown in FIGS. As shown, the ratio of executing the chance-up production in the production pattern for notifying that the chance-up production is controlled to the big win game state (the ratio of executing the chance-up production in the pattern CU-3 and the chance-up production in the pattern CU-4 10-14) regardless of the set value set in the pachinko machine 1 (15% in the example shown in FIGS. 10-14), while the set in the pachinko machine 1 The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 may be different according to the set value. By doing so, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by the player according to the execution ratio of the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, which are the effect patterns for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Since it is possible to suggest against, the interest of the chance-up production can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 129SG, a mode is exemplified in which the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested by the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4. It is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be capable of executing a setting value change suggesting effect indicating that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. In particular, when the setting value change suggesting effect is executed on the day after the low setting value is suggested by the chance-up effect or the like in the pachinko game machine 1, a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 for the player. Since it is possible to make the player expect that the game is being played, the game of the player can be promoted.

Further, in the characterizing section 129SG, the setting value suggesting effect is executed after the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4. may be set longer than the performance period of the chance-up performance. By doing so, as evidence that the game has been played on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the high setting value is set, the period during which the player shoots an image of the setting value suggesting effect with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone is shortened. can be secured. In addition, in the case where the period for the player to take the image of the set value suggesting effect is secured by setting the effect period of the set value suggesting effect longer than the effect period of the chance up effect in this way, the chance up is further increased. After the performance is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, by making it possible to execute the performance suggesting that the set value suggesting performance is executed, the player who recognizes the performance can suggest the set value. The mobile terminal may be prepared before the performance starts.

In addition, in the characteristic part 129SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 can be determined as the production pattern of the chance-up production irrespective of the type of the big win. The present invention is not limited to this, and only when the most advantageous jackpot type for the player in the variable special figure (for example, jackpot C if the jackpot type shown in FIG. 9-9) is determined Chance-up production Pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 may be determined as the effect pattern.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 129SG, the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 of the chance-up effect are exemplified as a special suggestive effect for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, but the present invention is this. However, the special suggestion production is a production that variably displays the decorative patterns in a combination of big hits (so-called all-rotation reach production), and a pseudo-continuous production that repeats the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative patterns. If so, the temporary stop and re-variable display up to the upper limit number of decorative symbols are performed as the pseudo-continuous effect, and the pending display notice effect of notifying the variable display result of the variable display that has not been executed yet in the display mode of the pending memory display is executed. If possible, display of the holding memory display in gold, rainbow color, etc., light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner to notify the big win, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R to inform the big win, specific movable body It may be an action or the like.

Furthermore, as a special suggestive effect, these full-rotation reach, pseudo-continuous effect, pending memory display effect, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8 and 8R, movement of the movable body, etc. Different set values may be suggested by combining the special suggesting effects of , and changing the effect mode of the special suggesting effect to be executed later.

For example, after it is notified that the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols are executed up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 4 times) as a pseudo-continuous effect and the control to the jackpot game state is performed, the all-rotation ready-to-win effect is executed. , as the all-rotation ready-to-win performance, if the variable display direction of the decorative pattern is directed from the top to the bottom, it is notified that the set value is any one of 1 to 3, and the decorative pattern is variably displayed as the full-rotation ready-to-reach performance. If the direction is from the left to the right, it is notified that the set value is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display direction of the decoration pattern is displayed as the all-rotation ready-to-win effect as viewed from the player. If it is directed from the far side to the near side of 5, it is notified that the set value is 6. - 特許庁

Further, for example, after the game effect lamp 9 emits rainbow color light at the start of the variable display to notify that the jackpot game state is controlled, if the melody A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the set value is changed. 1 to 3, and if melody B is output from speakers 8L and 8R, it is notified that the set value is any of 4 to 6, and melody C is output from speakers 8L and 8R. For example, it informs that the set value is 6.

Further, for example, after being notified that the variable display result corresponding to the pending memory display is displayed in rainbow color and that the variable display result corresponding to the pending memory display becomes a big hit (controlled to the big win game state after the end of the variable display). By the time the variable display for the big win ends, the movable body A operates to notify that the set value is one of 1 to 3, and the movable body B before the variable display for the big win ends. operates to notify that the set value is any one of 4 to 6, and both movable body A and movable body B operate until the variable display that becomes the big hit ends, so that the set value is 6 to notify that

In addition, in the characteristic portion 129SG, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested in both the chance-up effect and the setting-value suggesting effect. Since the value and the setting value suggested in the setting value suggesting effect are determined separately, it is conceivable that these suggestions do not match depending on the effect mode of the chance-up effect and the set value suggesting effect. For this reason, for example, when the set value is not suggested in the chance-up effect (when the execution of pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 is not determined), the set value is suggested only by the set value suggestion effect, A set value may be suggested in the chance-up presentation (execution of pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 is determined) only when non-execution of set value suggestion presentation is determined. In addition, the game hall clerk or the like uses the performance adjustment function provided in the pachinko game machine 1 to change whether or not the set value is suggested as a chance-up performance, and the ratio of execution/non-execution of the set value suggestion performance. It may be possible.

1 Pachinko game machine 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU
111F001 Suggestion display

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
variable display effect means for variably displaying effect identification information using the display means;
a suggestive display rendering means for displaying a suggestive display capable of suggesting the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state corresponding to the stage by changing the display mode step by step using the display means,
The suggestive display rendering means includes:
It is possible to once erase the suggestive display at a plurality of types of timing,
It is possible to display again after erasing the suggestive display,
When the suggestive display is displayed again, the suggestion that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state changes to a higher stage than before the temporary erasure after the specific effect executed before the temporary erasure is executed again. It is possible to display the display,
Depending on the timing at which the suggestive display is once erased, the ratio of the step corresponding to the degree of expectation that the re-displayed suggestive display will be controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The variable display effect means continuously and variably displays the effect identification information in a state where the suggestive display is once erased,
The suggestive display rendering means is capable of displaying the suggestive display again after temporarily erasing the suggestive display after a predetermined notification to the effect that the control to the advantageous state is not made.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images